JP5019889B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine and the like. Specifically, the display device includes a variable display device that performs a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified in each of the plurality of display regions and derives and displays a display result, and derives the plurality of display regions in the plurality of display regions. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a combination of displayed identification information results in a specific display result.

  What is conventionally known as this type of gaming machine is, for example, a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified in each of a plurality of display areas (left, middle, and right variation display areas). A variable display device that performs a variable display (variation) and derives and displays a display result (stop display). There is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit) that is advantageous to the player when a combination of symbols) is achieved.

In such a gaming machine, a special effect is presented in which a predetermined game clearing condition is presented in order to improve the interest of the game, and in the changing process, the game clearing condition is satisfied to become a combination of a big hit symbol. (Patent Document 1).
JP 2004-195199 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the game clear condition is presented and when it is determined to control the big hit, the game clear condition is always in the changing process until the big hit symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The control which satisfied was carried out. For this reason, when the game clear condition is presented, the player is made aware that the big hit is not controlled at the stage where the game clear condition is not established in the changing process. That is, in the case where the notification that the specific game state is controlled by the special effect is not performed in the variation process, the player is informed that the combination of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot is controlled by the variation. Would have diminished the fun of the game.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is controlled to a specific gaming state even when notification that the special gaming state is controlled is not performed. In contrast, an object is to provide a gaming machine capable of sustaining a sense of expectation held by a player.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A plurality of types of identification information (decorative symbols from 0 to 9) that can be identified in each of a plurality of display areas (left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas) are displayed in a variable manner, and the display result is derived and displayed. A variable display device (variable display device 9) is provided, and a combination of identification information derived from and displayed in the plurality of display areas of the variable display device (a combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on an effective line) is a specific display result ( A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that is controlled to a specific game state (a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when the combination of jackpot symbols is a set of three)
Whether to control to the specific gaming state (decision of big hit), and control to a special gaming state (probability changing state) advantageous to a player who is more easily controlled to the specific gaming state than the normal gaming state after the specific gaming state ends Prior determination means (S130, S131) for determining whether or not (probability change determination) before displaying the display result of the fluctuation display;
Means for determining the display result of the variation display of the identification information in the variation display device in accordance with a determination result (design control command such as a symbol information command and a variation pattern command) by the prior determination unit, The display result is determined to be a special display result (a combination of a probable big hit symbol combination and an odd symbol combination) among the specific display results on the condition that it is determined that the special gaming state is controlled by the determining means (S504, S529). , S546), the display result is a non-special other than the special display result among the specific display results on the condition that it is determined that the pre-determining means controls the specific game state but does not control the special game state. The display result (usually a combination of big jackpot symbols, three sets of 0 and even symbols) is determined (S503, S559, S560) The display result is determined as a non-specific display result (combination of combinations of symbols) other than the specific display result on the condition that it is determined not to control to the specific gaming state by the determining means (S512, S517, S572, S574) A result determining means (see FIGS. 40 to 43);
Result notifying means (S402 to S404) for starting the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device and deriving and displaying the display result determined by the display result determining means;
A valid period (mission period) over a plurality of variable displays, specific identification information (mission achievement symbol) of the plurality of types of identification information, and a specific display area (first special area) of the plurality of display areas In the production, the player notifies the left and right fluctuation display areas constituting the reach symbol, and in the second special production, the left fluctuation display area) so that the player can be specified, and the specific display area is specified in the specified effective period. When the identification information is displayed, special effect execution means for executing a special effect (first special effect, second special effect) controlled to the specific gaming state (the effect control microcomputer 800 in FIG. 4 and the like, FIG. 36). S484, S486, S473, S475 of FIG. 40),
The display result determining means includes
The special display area is identified other than the specific identification information on the condition that it is within the effective period of the special effect and is determined not to be controlled to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means. The non-specific display result that is information is determined (S572, S574),
The special identification information (probability variation pattern) used for the special display result as the specific identification information is within the effective period of the special effect informed (YES in S520, YES in S540), and the advance The special display result, which is a combination of the specific identification information, is determined at a predetermined ratio on the condition that the determination means controls the specific gaming state and the special gaming state is determined (achieved in S544). When the probability improvement table is selected, it is determined in S546 to be a combination of probability variation big hit symbols using mission achievement symbols with a probability of 80%),
Non-special identification information (normal symbol) used for the non-special display result as the specific identification information is within the effective period of the special effect informed, and the specific gaming state is determined by the predetermining means. The non-special combination that is a combination of the specific identification information at a rate lower than the predetermined rate on condition that it is determined that the control is not performed in the special gaming state (YES in S550, YES in S551). The display result is determined (the combination of the normal jackpot symbol using the mission achievement symbol is determined with a probability of 20% in S558 or S560 according to the distribution in the achievement probability normal table selected in S555).

  According to such a configuration, even when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state within the effective period of the special effect, identification other than the specific identification information notified in the special effect by the display result determining means There is a case where a specific display result that is a combination of information is determined. For this reason, even when the specific identification information is not displayed in the specific display area within the effective period of the special effect, the case where it is controlled to the specific gaming state may occur. Therefore, the player has a sense of expectation that the specific display result is derived and displayed even for the display result of the variable display in which the specific identification information is not displayed in the specific display area within the effective period of the special effect. Can be sustained.

  Further, when the non-special identification information is informed as the specific identification information by the display result determining means and it is determined that it is controlled to the specific gaming state but not to the special gaming state, it is a combination of the specific identification information. Special identification information is broadcasted as specific identification information at a rate higher than the rate at which the display result is determined, and when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state and to control to the special gaming state, the specific identification information A special display result that is a combination is determined. For this reason, when the special identification information is notified as the specific identification information and it is determined to control to the specific gaming state and to the special gaming state, the specific identification is made to the specific display area within the notified effective period. The rate at which special identification information is displayed as information can be increased, and the interest in special effects can be improved.

(2) The prior determination means further notifies whether to control to the special gaming state after displaying a display result when determining to control to the special gaming state and to control to the special gaming state. To determine whether or not to execute a state notification effect (promotion effect) (S132)
The result notification means executes the state notification effect on the condition that the state determination effect is determined to be executed by the pre-decision unit (the first special big hit reach and the second special big hit reach change display). Done)
The display result determination means displays before executing the state notification effect regardless of whether the special effect is within the effective period and whether the specific identification information is the special identification information. The display result is determined as the non-special display result (S506, S528).

  According to such a configuration, the display result displayed before the state notification effect is executed by the display result determining means is determined as a non-special display result. For this reason, even before the state notification effect is executed, the non-special identification information is displayed and specified if it is within the effective period of the special effect in which the non-special identification information is notified as the specific identification information. Even if it is within the effective period of the special performance in which the special identification information is notified as the identification information, control for forcibly displaying the special identification information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the state notification effect is executed thereafter, and to improve the interest in the state notification effect.

  (3) The display result determining means controls the specific gaming state by the pre-deciding means when it is within the effective period of the special effect in which the non-special identification information is notified as the specific identification information. Is determined to be the non-special display result that is a combination of the specific identification information when it is determined not to control to the special gaming state (in the case of YES in S550, selected in S555 in FIG. 43B) A display that is displayed before executing the state notification effect when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state and to be controlled to the special gaming state by the predetermining means at a higher rate than the normalization probability achievement table) As a result, the non-special display result that is a combination of the specific identification information is determined (in the case of YES in S522, the achievement probability of FIG. 43A in S526) Above table is selected).

  According to such a configuration, when a non-special display result that is a combination of the specific identification information is displayed within the effective period of the special performance in which the non-special identification information is notified as the specific identification information, Thereafter, the rate at which the state notification effect is performed can be increased. Therefore, when non-special identification information is reported as specific identification information, when a non-special display result that is a combination of the specific identification information is displayed, by increasing the rate at which the state notification effect is performed It is possible to improve the interest in the special effect and the state notification effect.

  (4) When the special identification information is notified as the specific identification information within the effective period of the special effect, and controlled to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means, but controlled to the special gaming state The non-special identification information is notified as the specific identification information on the condition that it is determined not to be performed (S554), and within the effective period of the special effect in which the non-special display result is notified as the specific identification information In some cases, the special identification information is notified as the specific identification information on the condition that it is determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state and controlled to the special gaming state by the prior determination means (S543) Specific identification information effect execution means (S554, S5) for executing the identification information effect (mission achievement symbol addition effect) before displaying the display result of the variable display. 3, S402, S403) further comprises.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific display result determined by the display result determination unit corresponding to the determination result by the prior determination unit is not a combination of the specific identification information being notified, the determination by the prior determination unit A specific identification information effect in which identification information used for a specific display result determined by the display result determination means corresponding to the result is notified as specific identification information is executed. By executing such a specific identification information effect, it is possible to increase the chances that the specific identification information is displayed in a specific display area within the effective period of the special effect, and to improve the interest for the special effect Can do.

(5) The variable display device has three or more display areas (left, middle, and right variable display areas),
The special effect execution means has two or more displays other than the final display area (medium variation display area) in which identification information is finally displayed according to a predetermined order (left, right, middle order) as the specific display area. Informing the player of the area (left and right fluctuation display area, the fluctuation display area constituting the reach) in a identifiable manner,
The display result determining means is in the effective period of the special effect, and on the condition that the prior determination means determines not to control the specific gaming state, the display result determining means Of these, the identification information of the first display area (left variation display area) where the identification information is displayed first in accordance with the predetermined order is any identification information other than the specific identification information (design other than the mission achievement graphic) The specific identification information is determined at a rate higher than the rate determined at (S571, see FIG. 43 (d)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the rate at which specific identification information is displayed in the previous display area in the variable display performed within the effective period of the special effect. For this reason, it is possible to increase the chances of sustaining the expectation that specific identification information is displayed in a specific display area within the effective period even after the identification information is displayed in the previous display area. Can improve interest in

(6) a clocking means (RTCM 100 in FIG. 4) for clocking time and date that can be specified;
Special effect execution for determining whether or not a special effect execution condition for executing the special effect has been established (the date and time of setting the special effect shown in FIG. 12 (f) has been reached) based on the time value of the time measuring means. Condition determining means (first control microcomputer 800 for effect control in FIG. 4, first effect control microcomputer for effect control other than display control such as sound control and lamp control shown in the modification, and display on the variable display device 9 Two effect control microcomputers (hereinafter referred to as effect control microcomputer 800 and the like) when the second effect control microcomputer performing control is provided on another control board, S335 in FIG. 32, FIG. And S480, S481),
The special effect execution means executes the special effect every time the special effect execution condition determination means determines that the special effect execution condition is satisfied (the effect control microcomputer 800 in FIG. 4 and the like, FIG. 36). S484, S486, and S473, S475 of FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the special effect execution condition is satisfied based on the time value of the time measuring means, and the special effect is executed. For this reason, a special effect can be executed according to the time value of the time measuring means.

(7) Whether or not a preset change condition is satisfied based on the time value of the time measuring means (as shown in FIG. 12 (f), the time value of the RTCM 100 is changed from a weekday date to Saturday and Sunday) Or change condition determination means for determining that the date has changed to the date of a holiday and that the date has changed from Saturday, Sunday, or the date of a holiday to the date of a weekday (such as the production control microcomputer 800 in FIG. 4) S335) in FIG.
When it is determined that the change condition is satisfied by the change condition determination means, the special effect execution condition determination means determines that the special effect execution condition is determined by the special effect execution condition determination means during a specific period (one day as shown in FIG. 12 (f)). The number of times determined to be established is changed (in the special effect information table as shown in FIG. 12 (f), the number of times the special effect is executed is set differently on weekdays, Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays. Therefore, when the clock value of RTCM 100 shifts from a weekday to Saturday, Sunday, or a national holiday, and when it shifts from a Saturday, Sunday, or public holiday to a weekday, a special performance is executed on one day. Special effect execution frequency changing means (the number of times is changed) (the effect control microcomputer 800 of FIG. 4 and the like, the special effect information table of FIG. 12F, S335 of FIG. 32) 336) further comprises a.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the change condition is satisfied based on the time value of the time measuring means, the number of times that it is determined that the special performance execution condition is satisfied per specific period is changed. This changes the timing at which the special effect is executed and the number of times the special effect is executed per specific period, so the timing at which the special effect is executed and the number of times the special effect is executed per specific period. The player can also be interested in the execution form of the production. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

(8) Game control means (main board 31 in FIG. 4, game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command (effect control command) for controlling the variable display device;
Production control means (production control board 80 in FIG. 4, production control microcomputer 800, modification example) that controls the variable display device in a predetermined production mode based on the production control command transmitted from the game control means. The first effect control microcomputer that performs effect control other than display control such as sound control and lamp control shown in 10) and the second effect control microcomputer that performs display control of the variable display device 9 are separated. Two control microcomputers and a corresponding control board) provided on the control board,
The production control means includes
The timing means;
The special performance execution means;
Command input means (connector 801 in FIG. 5) for inputting the effect control command,
The command input means can input a date / time standard value command (standard date / time command) indicating a standard value of the date / time used by the timing means.
When the date standard value command is input from the command input unit, the effect control unit sets the time measured by the time measuring unit to a standard value based on the standard value of the date indicated by the date standard value command. Date and time setting means (S603 in FIG. 44) is further included.

  According to such a configuration, when the date / time standard value command indicating the standard value of the date / time used by the time measuring means is input from the command input means in the production control means, the date / time indicated by the date / time standard value command is displayed. Based on the standard value, the time value by the time measuring means is set to the standard value. Thereby, in the production control means, the timekeeping value by the timekeeping means is set to the standard value based on inputting the date / time standard value command from the command input means which is an existing configuration in which the production control command is inputted. With regard to the configuration related to the production control means necessary for setting the time measured value by the means to the standard value, the existing configuration can be used, and the versatility of the configuration can be ensured. And since it becomes possible to set the timekeeping value by the timekeeping means to the standard value in this way, the timekeeping value by the timekeeping means can be made more accurate. When a predetermined effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of gaming machines, it is possible to accurately match the effects performed on the respective gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be a coin gaming machine or other gaming machines such as a slot machine, each of a plurality of display areas. A variable display device that performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and derives and displays a display result, and identifies combinations of identification information that are derived and displayed in the plurality of display areas of the variable display device Any gaming machine may be used as long as it is controlled in a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result is obtained.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front, and FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game board.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a game hall (game shop). A plurality of gaming machine installation islands in which a plurality of gaming machines are arranged side by side are provided in the game hall, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on such a gaming machine installation island. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 for storing game balls (hit balls) as game media. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the game balls. A selection button 358 that can be operated by the player is provided on the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  Near the center of the game area 7, there is provided a variable display device (decorative symbol display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display regions each displaying a decorative symbol for effect. In addition, a special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other is provided at the top of the variable display device 9. The fluctuation display device 9 has, for example, three fluctuation display areas (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The variable display device 9 displays decorative symbols as decorative information as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified during the variable symbol display period of the special symbols by the special symbol indicator 8. To do. The variable display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer 800 (see FIG. 4) mounted on an effect control board 80 described later. Since the display portion of the special symbol display 8 is small, the variation display mode and the display result of the variation display are difficult to see compared with the variation display device 9, so the player mainly pays attention to the variation display device 9.

  The special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to display various numbers such as 0 to 99 in a variable manner in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the type of winning. The variable display device 9 is realized by an image display device including a liquid crystal display device. The variation display device 9 displays the variation of the decorative symbol during the variation display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the variable display device 9 uses a liquid crystal display device will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display device 9 may be a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) or FED (Field Emission Display). ), PDP (Plasma Display Panel), dot matrix, LED (Light Emitting Diode) such as 7-segment LED, electroluminescence, and other image display type display devices such as a fluorescent display tube. The fluctuation display device 9 may be a mechanical display device such as a rotary drum display device.

  Below the variable display device 9 are provided four special symbol hold memory indicators 18 for displaying the number of memorized valid winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). It has been. The special symbol reservation storage display 18 displays up to four reservation storage numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol hold memory display 18 increases the stored data in the hold memory by 1 and increases the number of lit LEDs by 1 each time there is a start winning in the start winning opening 14. Each time the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display, the special symbol storage memory display 18 decreases the storage data of the storage by 1 and decreases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 (that is, one LED Is turned off. Specifically, the special symbol hold storage display 18 shifts the lighting state every time the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display. In this example, an upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the number of reserved storage by winning to the start winning opening 14. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper limit number of the reserved storage number may be a value of 4 or more, or may be a value less than 4.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a start winning opening 14 is provided below the variable display device 9. The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is provided with a pair of left and right movable pieces in such a manner that it can be opened and closed. The movable piece of the variable winning ball device 15 is driven by the solenoid 16 to be in an open state for a predetermined period when an opening condition described later is satisfied. When the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), and the player is in an advantageous state (first state). . On the other hand, when the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (it is difficult to start winning), which is disadvantageous for the player (second state). It becomes. The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 using an opening / closing plate that is opened and closed by a solenoid 21 is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided with a big winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing plate, and the opening / closing plate is controlled to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state In other states, the open / close plate is controlled to a closed state (second state) which is disadvantageous to the player. As described above, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 satisfies the release condition when it enters the big hit gaming state. Of the winning balls that are won in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 and guided to the back of the game board 6, the winning ball that has entered one (V winning area: special area) is detected by the V winning switch 22 and then counted by the count switch 23. The game ball that has been detected and entered the other region is detected by the count switch 23 as it is. On the back of the game board 6, a solenoid 21A for switching the path in the special winning opening is also provided.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 10 that displays a variable symbol as a plurality of types of identification information is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized at the time of lighting) are alternately turned on to perform the variable display. For example, if the left lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the opening condition of the variable winning ball device 15 is established, and the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. Become. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, there is provided a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of stored effective passing spheres that have passed through the gate 32, that is, the number of start passing memories. Yes. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, the memory data of the start passage memory is incremented by 1, and the normal symbol start memory display 41 increments the LED to be lit by 1. Then, every time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the stored data of the start passage memory is decreased by 1, and the LED to be lit is decreased by 1.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39. The winning of the game balls to the winning ports 29, 30, 33, 39 is detected by the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. Around the left and right of the game area 7, there are provided decorative lamps 25 blinking and displayed during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for absorbing a game ball that has not won a prize. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In this example, a prize ball lamp 51 that is lit during award ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. Is provided. Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as “card unit”) 50 that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various light emitting means such as a prize ball lamp 51, a ball break lamp 52, a decoration lamp 25, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are controlled to be lit (lamp control) by a lamp driver board 35 described later. . Further, sound generation control (sound control) from the speaker 27 is performed by an audio output board 70 described later.

  The card unit 50 includes, for example, a usable display lamp that indicates whether or not the card unit 50 is in a usable state, a connected table direction indicator that indicates which side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the card unit 50, and a card. Check the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card has been inserted into the unit 50, the card insertion slot into which a card as a recording medium is inserted, and the mechanism of the card reader / writer provided on the back of the card insertion slot. A card unit lock is provided for releasing the card unit 50 in the case of doing so.

  A game ball launched from the ball striking device by the player's operation enters the game area 7 through the hit ball rail, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display if the variation display of the symbol can be started. If the symbol display cannot be started, the number of reserved memories is increased by one.

  The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 stops when the variation display time set every time the variation display is performed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (also referred to as a jackpot display result) as a specific display result, it will be a jackpot and the game will shift to a jackpot gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins. Then, when the game ball is won in the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 22 while the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed with a predetermined number of times such as 15 rounds as an upper limit value. Such control is called repeated continuation control. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened is called a round. In addition, you may control not to provide V winning area but to generate a continuation right unconditionally in each round.

  When the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 at the time of stoppage becomes a predetermined special big hit symbol (probability variable big hit symbol) of the big hit symbol, the probability that it will be determined that the big hit after the big hit gaming state (big hit probability) However, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in a probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variation state) that becomes higher than the normal game state, which is a normal state different from the big hit game state. Hereinafter, the probability variation state is also referred to as a high probability state (sometimes abbreviated as a high probability state). Further, the non-probable change state is also referred to as a low probability state (sometimes abbreviated as a low probability state).

  In addition, when the display result of the special symbol becomes a probable big hit symbol, in addition to being controlled to become a high probability state after the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the short time state which is a variable time shortening state. Is done. The short time state means that each of the special symbol display 8, the variable display device 9, and the normal symbol display 10 has a variable display time (at the start of variable display) as compared to the normal game state (the low probability low base state described later). The time from when the display result is derived and displayed to the display result is shortened, and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage. Furthermore, during the time-shortening state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is lengthened, and the number of times of opening is increased. In the short-time state, the display time of the fluctuation of the symbol is shortened, so that the number of reserved memories to be described later is exhausted early, and the start winnings that have occurred exceeding the upper limit (for example, “4”) of the reserved memory number are invalidated. Since it is easy to derive and display the jackpot display result early in the short term, it is easy to derive and display the jackpot display result early, so the display result of the variable display is likely to become the display result of the jackpot symbol from a time efficient viewpoint It becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player. The short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state is continued until the special symbol and the decorative symbol change display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 100 times). The short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  Further, when considering from the aspect of paying out the game ball according to the winning, in the short time state, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to the non-time short state, and the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes the winning symbol. Based on the fact that the probability is increased, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 at the time of winning is increased, and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 at the time of hitting is increased once, it is variable compared with the normal gaming state. The winning ball device 15 is likely to be in an open state. Therefore, in the short-time state, winning in the start winning opening 14 (including both cases where the start winning is valid and invalid) is likely to occur, so the number of game balls (hit hit) into the game area 7 The ratio of the number of game balls (the number of payout balls) to be paid out as prize balls according to the winnings is larger than the normal game state. In general, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls by winning a prize to the number of shot balls is called “base”. For example, when there are 40 payout balls with respect to 100 shot balls, the base is 40 (%). In the case of this embodiment, for example, a time-short state having a higher base than a non-time-short state such as a normal gaming state is called a high base state, and conversely, a normal gaming state having a lower base compared to such a high base state Such a non-time-short state is called a low base state.

  Of the big hits, those that are controlled to a high probability state and a short time state after the big hit gaming state are called probable big hits. The probable big hit is a big hit that becomes a high probability state and a high base state by entering a probable change state and a short time state after the big hit gaming state. Such a state with a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a highly accurate high base state. Of the big hits, those that are not controlled to the high probability state and not controlled to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state are usually called big hits. Usually, the big hit is a big hit (non-probable big hit) that becomes a low probability state and a low base state by not being in a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state and being in a short time state. Such a state with a low probability state and a low base state is called a low probability low base state.

  In the following description, when “big hit” is simply indicated without specifying the types of big hits, it is a case where these multiple types of big hits are representatively shown.

  For each of the normal jackpot and the probable big hit, a special symbol jackpot display result is predetermined. A special jackpot display result of a special symbol indicating a normal jackpot is called a normal jackpot display result. The jackpot display result of the special symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot display result.

  Whether the probability variation state (high probability state) or the non-probability variation state (low probability state) is determined based on whether or not the probability variation flag that is set in the probability variation state is set. The Whether the time-short state (high base state) or the non-time-short state (low base state) is determined is determined based on whether or not the time-short flag, which is a flag set in the time-short state, is set. Is done.

  In addition, in the state that is not controlled to the above-mentioned time-short state, every time the number of special symbols on-hold storage exceeds a predetermined number, the memory that controls the memory variation shortened state that shortens the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol Variation shortening control is performed. The memory fluctuation shortening control ends when the number of reserved symbols for special symbols is less than a predetermined number. Therefore, even in a state where the time-short state is not controlled, there is a case where the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened.

  The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the variable display device 9 are variably displayed in a predetermined relationship with the special symbol variation display in order to enhance the decoration effect of the special symbol variation display in the special symbol display 8. It is a symbol with a special meaning. For example, the predetermined relationship with respect to the symbol includes, for example, the relationship in which the variation display of the decorative symbol starts when the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the display result of the special symbol at the end of the variation display of the special symbol. This includes a relationship in which operations such as a relationship in which a decorative symbol display result is derived and displayed and a decorative symbol variation display ends are synchronized. When a special jackpot symbol (including a probabilistic big jackpot symbol and a normal jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result by the special symbol display 8, the variable display device 9 has three left, middle and right symbols. The jackpot symbol combination (including the probability variation jackpot symbol combination and the normal jackpot symbol combination) is derived and displayed as a display result. Such a display result of the jackpot symbol by the special symbol and the display result of the combination of the jackpot symbol by the decoration symbol are referred to as a jackpot display result.

  Since the special symbol display 8 and the variation display device 9 have the correspondence as described above, they may be collectively referred to as a variation display unit in the following description.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in the present embodiment means that the symbols that have not been stopped when the stopped symbols constitute a part of the jackpot symbol, and that all or This is a state where some symbols are synchronously displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, in the variable display device 9, an effective line (one effective line in the case of the present embodiment) that becomes a big hit when the symbol stops is determined in advance, and a part of the display area on the effective line is displayed. A state in which the variable display is performed in the display area on the active line that has not been stopped when the predetermined symbol is stopped (for example, the left, middle, and right variable display areas in the variable display device 9). Of these, all or some of the display areas on the valid line) Are in a variable display in synchronism while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the variable display is performed in all of the left, middle and right display areas in the variable display device 9, Same state) the variation displayed with the symbol are aligned is made that reach the display mode or reach. In addition, the symbols that are in the reach display mode are called reach symbols.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a background image of the variable display device 9 (an image serving as the background of the decoration design) ) Display mode (for example, color) may be changed. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. A specific reach for performing such a special performance is called a special reach (super reach or premium reach). In the case of this embodiment, the special reach can be selected both when it is a big hit and when it is a big hit, but it is much easier to select when it is a big hit than when it is a big hit. Is set. The special reach may be set so that it is always selected and displayed when it is a big hit.

  Further, for the variable display device 9, there is a case where a big hit notice, which is a notice effect for notifying that a big hit is given, is performed in the variable display that triggers the generation of the big hit.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are a variable display control unit 49 including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer for controlling the variable display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, and the like. Various boards such as a mounted game control board (main board) 31, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control are mounted are installed. ing.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91A on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted. Although most of the power supply substrate 910 overlaps with the main substrate 31, there is an exposed portion that is exposed so as to be visible from the outside without overlapping the main substrate 31. The exposed portion is provided on the main board 31 and each electrical component control board (production control board 80, payout control board 37, audio output board 70, and lamp driver board 35) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power switch is provided as a power supply permission means for executing or cutting off power supply to each of the electric components (components that operate when power is supplied). Furthermore, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch in the exposed portion (inside the substrate).

  An electrical component control means including an electrical component control microcomputer is mounted on the electrical component control board. The electrical component control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, variable display device 9, lamp) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. And light emitters such as LEDs, speakers 27, etc.). Hereinafter, description may be made by including the main board 31 in the electric component control board. In that case, the electrical component control means mounted on the electrical component control board includes a game control means and means for controlling the electrical components provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal from the game control means and the like. Each of them. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate.

  On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 160 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. The terminal board 160 includes at least a ball break terminal for introducing the output of the ball break detection switch 167 and outputting it externally, a prize ball terminal for outputting prize ball information (prize ball number signal) and a ball. A ball lending terminal for externally outputting lending information (ball lending number signal) is provided. Near the center, an information terminal board (information output board) 36 provided with terminals for outputting various information from the main board 31 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

  The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through a guide rail (not shown), and reaches a ball payout device covered with a payout case 40A through a curve rod. A ball break switch 187 as a game medium break detection means is provided on the upper part of the ball payout device. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail (in the storage tank 38). (Proximate part). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning prizes or game balls based on ball lending requests are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 becomes full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch (not shown) as a storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as a storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board 31. 4 also shows a payout control board 37, a lamp driver board 35, an audio output board 70, an interface board 66, a relay board 77, and an effect control board 80 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. . The main board (game control board) 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560 serving as a basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a gate switch 32a, a start port switch 14a, V An input driver circuit 58 for supplying signals from the winning switch 22, count switch 23, winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and all winning counting switches 34 to the game control microcomputer 560, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 A solenoid 16 that opens and closes, a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 21A for switching a path in the special winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560, and a game Control microcomputer 560 An information output circuit 53 for outputting various information signals to a device provided outside the pachinko game machine 1 such as a hall computer are mounted in accordance with a command al.

  It should be noted that switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the V winning switch 22, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, the all winning count switch 34, and the like may be referred to as sensors. . That is, the name of the game medium detection means is not limited as long as it is a game medium detection means (game ball detection means in this example) that can detect a game ball. Each of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a for detecting the winning is also a winning detecting means for detecting the winning of the game ball in the winning area.

  Even if a pass gate such as the gate 32 is used, a game ball enters the pass gate if the prize ball is paid out, and a switch (for example, a switch provided in the pass gate (for example, The gate switch 32a) becomes a winning detection means. In addition, a game ball won in the V winning area is detected by the V winning switch 22 and also by the count switch 23. Therefore, the number of game balls won in the special winning opening corresponds to the number detected by the count switch 23. Further, the game balls won in the V prize area are detected only by the V prize switch 22, and the number of game balls won in the big prize opening is determined by the number detected by the V prize switch 22 and the number detected by the count switch 23. You may make it become the sum. Further, the V winning area may not be provided, and the continuation right may always be generated in rounds other than the final round. Also, a V winning area is provided so that the continuation right is generated unconditionally (regardless of the winning in the V winning area) in the first round, and the continuation right is generated by winning in the V winning area in the second and subsequent rounds. May be.

  The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, and storage means (variable data storage means for storing fluctuation data) used as a work memory. RAM (Random Access Memory) 55, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 56 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, and an I / O port 506. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. Note that the one-chip microcomputer may include at least the RAM 55 in addition to the CPU 56. Further, the ROM 54 and the I / O port 506 may be externally attached or built in.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, what the game control microcomputer 560 described below executes (or performs processing) means that the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a game control microcomputer 560 including a CPU 56.

  Although not shown, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a clock circuit that generates a clock signal, a reset controller that functions as a system reset means, a random number circuit, and a CTC that sends an interrupt request signal to the CPU 56. To do.

  The random number circuit is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. This random number circuit updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 256) are set, and at random timing. Based on the fact that the start winning time to be generated is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the numerical data from the random number circuit as the random number value R1 when the start winning to the start port switch 14a occurs, and makes the jackpot display result as a specific display result based on the numerical data. Whether or not to make a big hit. When it is determined that the game is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. Whether the random number generated by the random number circuit is a big hit, such as a random number for probability variation determination for determining whether or not to make a probability variation, and a random number for variation pattern determination for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. It may be used as a random number for determination other than determination.

  The random number circuit includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule. It has various functions such as a selection switching function. With such a function, the random number circuit can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  The clock circuit outputs a system clock signal to the CPU 56, and outputs a reference clock signal CLK having a predetermined cycle generated by dividing the system clock signal to the power of 2 (= 128) to each random number circuit. When a low level signal is input for a certain period, the reset controller 502 outputs a predetermined initialization signal to the CPU 56 and each random number circuit to reset the game control microcomputer 560 as a system.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with two random number circuits having different ranges of random number values that can be generated. The first random number circuit is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 12-bit random number circuit) that generates a 12-bit pseudo-random number. The 12-bit random number circuit has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated by 12 bits (that is, a range from 1 to 4095). The second random number circuit is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 16-bit random number circuit) that generates a 16-bit pseudo random number. The 16-bit random number circuit has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated by 16 bits (that is, a range from 1 to 65535). One of the two random number circuits selected in advance is used to generate a random number. Note that both a 16-bit random number circuit and a 12-bit random number circuit may be used for generating random numbers, such as using a 12-bit random number circuit for generating random numbers for determining a variation pattern.

  In this embodiment, the case where the game control microcomputer 560 includes two random number circuits will be described. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may include one random number circuit, and may include three or more random number circuits. A random number circuit may be incorporated. In this embodiment, when the 12-bit random number circuit and the 16-bit random number circuit are comprehensively expressed, or when any one of the 12-bit random number circuit and the 16-bit random number circuit is indicated, the random number circuit is referred to.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part of the RAM 55 is kept for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). Or the entire contents are preserved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the control state of the game (special symbol process flag or the like) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the RAM 55 as backup data. The data corresponding to the control state is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire storage area of the RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The reset signal from the power supply board 910 is also input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer become operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer stop operating. It becomes a state. Therefore, during the period in which the reset signal is at a high level, an allowance signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output, and during the period in which the reset signal is at a low level, An operation stop signal for stopping the operations of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output. A reset circuit may be mounted on each electrical component control board (including the main board 31), or a reset circuit is mounted on one or more of the plurality of electrical component control boards, and a reset signal is output therefrom. You may make it supply to another electric component control board.

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 910 has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560 via the payout control board 37. In addition, a clear signal indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM 55 is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  The clear signal is branched in the main board 31 and is also supplied to the payout control board 37. Note that the state of the clear signal input by the game control microcomputer 560 via the input port may be output to the payout control board 37 via the output port.

  The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an effect control command (effect control signal) as a control signal for instructing effect control including display control, sound control, and lamp control to the effect control board 80. The effect control board 80 receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 and performs an electric component control means such as an effect control microcomputer 800 for performing display control in the variable display device 9. Is installed. The effect control board 80 is, for example, a processing device having a display control function for performing image display and a high-speed drawing function in addition to the effect control microcomputer 800, and a VDP (Video Display) for performing display control of the variable display device 9. Processor) 88, a character ROM 89 for storing image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 in advance, and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 83 for expanding the image data generated by the VDP 88. The detailed configuration of the effect control board 80 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The production control microcomputer 800 includes a ROM 84 that stores a display control program, a RAM 85 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 86 that is a processor that performs a display control operation according to the program, and an I / O port 87. Including. This effect control microcomputer 800 controls various display effects such as the variable display of the variable display device 9 in response to the effect control command, the prize ball lamp 51, the ball-out lamp 52, the decoration lamp 25, and the ceiling lamp. Control relating to various effects including control of 28a, left frame lamp 28b and right frame lamp 28c (lamp control) and game sound generation control (sound control) using the speaker 27 is performed.

  The CPU 86 operates using a clock signal supplied from a clock circuit (not shown) provided on the effect control board 80 as a reference clock signal, reads an effect control program stored in the ROM 84, and follows the program. An effect control operation such as a display control operation is performed. The I / O port 87 is used for input / output of various data and various signals.

  The CPU 86 controls the VDP 88 according to the received effect control command, and causes the VDP 88 to read necessary data from the character ROM 89. The VDP 88 generates image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 based on the image data read from the character ROM, and expands the image data in the VRAM 83. Then, the image data developed in the VRAM 83 is output to the variable display device 9, whereby various images such as images in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner are displayed on the variable display device 9.

  The effect control microcomputer 800 receives the effect control command at the capture timing indicated by the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 800 performs display control of the variable display device 9 and speaker 27 in order to perform display control, sound control and lamp control to be performed in response to the effect indicated by the received effect control command. Drive signals and various lamp drive signals. In such a configuration, when the effect control is performed based on the effect control command, the sound control and the lamp control are performed by the effect control microcomputer 800 in accordance with the display control of the variable display device 9. That is, in the effect control microcomputer, the display control of the variation display device 9 is performed based on the effect control command, and the sound control and the lamp control corresponding to the display control content are performed, whereby the display control of the variation display device 9 is performed. The sound control and the lamp control are performed (synchronized) in accordance with the production.

  The production control microcomputer 800 outputs a sound such as a sound effect from the speaker 27 by outputting a drive signal of the speaker 27 to the sound output board 70. The effect control microcomputer 800 controls the light emitting means as described above by outputting drive signals of various light emitting means to the lamp driver board 35. Thus, sound control and light emission control are performed in response to (in synchronization with) the effect display on the variable display device 9.

  In addition, as a signal line for transmitting the effect control command, a configuration using one signal line, that is, a serial signal line is adopted instead of the configuration using the parallel signal lines such as the above-mentioned eight. Also good. When the serial signal line is used, the production control command is serial data, the start bit of the low level signal is transmitted before the transmission of the serial data, and the stop bit of the high level signal is transmitted after the transmission of the serial data. Since the start control command is taken in by the start bit and the stop bit, the effect control microcomputer 800 receives serial data transmitted between the start bit and the stop bit as the effect control command. .

  The audio output board 70 is a board on which an audio ROM 71, an audio IC 72, and an output circuit 73 are formed as circuits for generating sounds such as sounds and sound effects from the speaker 27. The production control microcomputer 800 outputs a sound control signal for performing control to generate sound from the speaker 27 toward the sound output board 70, and is formed on the sound output board 70 in accordance with the sound control signal. By operating the circuit, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 27. Thereby, the sound is controlled in response to (in synchronization with) the effect display on the variable display device 9.

  The lamp driver board 35 includes a lamp driver circuit 351 for driving various light emitting means such as a prize ball lamp 51, a ball break lamp 52, a decoration lamp 25, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c. A substrate on which a circuit is formed. The production control microcomputer 800 outputs drive signals of various light emitting means to the lamp driver substrate 35 and operates a circuit formed on the lamp driver substrate 35 in accordance with the drive signals as described above. The light emission control of various light emitting means is performed. Thereby, light emission control is performed in response to (in synchronization with) the effect display on the variable display device 9.

  In addition to the lamp driver circuit 351, for example, an RTCM (real time clock module) 100, a clock circuit 353, a RAM 354, a setting operation unit 355, and backup power supply circuits 356 and 357 are mounted on the lamp driver board 35. The RTCM 100 is a device that measures time to indicate the current “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transmission path of the production control command between the main board 31 and the production control board 80 and the transmission path of the standard date / time command from the standard date / time data output device 300 to the production control board 80. FIG.

  The effect control command has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  Between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, eight signal lines L1 to L8 and an effect control INT signal as a strobe signal are transmitted as parallel signal lines for transmitting effect control commands as parallel signals. One signal line L9 is provided. Parallel connectors (not shown) are provided at both ends of the signal lines L1 to L9. For the signal lines L1 to L9, a parallel connector on one end side is attached to a parallel connector 311 provided on the main board 31, and a parallel connector on the other end side is provided on the effect control board 80. By attaching to the parallel type connector 801, the main board 31 and the production control board 80 are connected, and the production control command is communicated between the game control microcomputer 560 and the production control microcomputer 800. It is possible.

  The effect control microcomputer 800 receives effect control commands from the eight signal lines L1 to L8 for transmitting effect control commands at the capture timing indicated by the effect control INT signal from the signal line L9. Then, the effect control microcomputer 800 analyzes the MODE data and the EXT data of the received effect control command, specifies that the received command is the effect control command, and specifies the effect content indicated by the effect control command. Then, in order to perform display control, sound control, and lamp control that should be performed in accordance with the content of the effect indicated by the effect control command, the display control of the variable display device 9 is performed, and the control signal of the speaker 27 and various lamps are controlled. The drive signal is output. In such a configuration, when the effect control is performed based on the effect control command, the sound control and the lamp control are performed by the effect control microcomputer 800 in accordance with the display control of the variable display device 9. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 800 performs display control of the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command, and also performs sound control and lamp control corresponding to the display control content, whereby the variable display device 9 Sound control and lamp control that match (synchronize with) the effects of display control are performed.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 800 is provided separately from the pachinko gaming machine 1 and from a standard date / time data output device 300 that can be connected to the circuit (input port) inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to receive a standard date / time command (standard date / time signal) that is an output command. The standard date / time data output device 300 includes a real-time clock unit 302, a control unit 303, an operation unit 304, and a connector 301. The standard date / time data output device 300 is command data indicating a time value (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) synchronized with Japan standard time. This is a device that outputs a date / time command to the outside, and is used to synchronize the time value of the RTCM 100 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the standard time, that is, to set the time value of the RTCM 100 to an accurate time value.

  The real-time clock unit 302 has a function of automatically adjusting the time measurement value to the Japan standard time periodically using a radio clock, and performs the same time measurement as the RTCM 100 (time measurement of year / month / day / hour / hour / minute / second). The control unit 303 performs various controls such as outputting a standard date / time command indicating the time value (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) in the real-time clock unit 302 to the outside. The connector 301 is a parallel-type connector for outputting a standard date / time command to the outside as a parallel signal in the same data format as the effect control command. The operation unit 304 includes operation means such as a switch provided for performing various operations such as an operation necessary for outputting a standard date / time command to the outside.

  The standard date / time command is composed of 2 bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification and type), and the second byte represents EXT (standard value data). Since the above-described effect control command and standard date / time command are set so that the MODE data is classified into different classifications, the effect control microcomputer 800 determines that the received command is an effect based on the MODE data. It can be determined whether it belongs to a control command or a standard date / time command. Such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  For such a standard date / time data output apparatus 300, eight signal lines L 11 to L 18 and standard date / time INT signals as strobe signals are transmitted as parallel signal lines for transmitting standard date / time commands as parallel signals. And one signal line L19. Parallel connectors (not shown) are provided at both ends of the signal lines L11 to L19. As for the signal lines L11 to L19, one end side parallel connector is attached to the parallel connector 301 provided in the standard date / time data output device 300, and the other end parallel connector is connected to the effect control board 80. By attaching to the parallel connector 801 provided, the standard date and time data output device 300 and the effect control board 80 are connected, and the standard date and time data output device 300 and the effect control microcomputer 800 are connected. Enables communication of standard date / time commands.

  When using the standard date and time data output device 300, the connectors of the signal lines L1 to L9 for the effect control command provided on the effect control board 80 are removed, and the connector on one end side is attached to the connector 301 of the standard date and time data output device 300. The connectors on the other end side of the signal lines L11 to L19 are attached to the connector 801 provided on the effect control board 80. And the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (inspector at the manufacturing stage, the person in charge of the inspector at the shipping stage), and the person at the game hall (game shop clerk, inspector at the game hall, etc.) When an operation for outputting a standard date / time command is performed on the operation unit 304 by an operator such as a person in charge of the user, the control unit 303 receives a time value (second, minute, hour, day of the week, day of the week) from the real-time clock unit 302. , Month, year) data is sequentially read out, and a standard date / time command indicating the time value indicated by the data is output from the connector 301 to the outside via the signal lines L11 to L18, and a standard date / time INT signal is output to the signal line L19. Control to output to the outside. As a result, the standard date and time commands are transmitted through the signal lines L11 to L18 and input to the effect control microcomputer 800 via the connector 801.

  When the standard date / time data output device 300 is connected by the signal lines L11 to L19, the effect control microcomputer 800 uses the eight signal lines L11 at the capture timing indicated by the standard date / time INT signal from the signal line L19. A standard date / time command is received from L18. Specifically, the standard date and time command is a command (standard second command, standard minute command, standard time command, standard day of week) that indicates standard value data for each of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, days, months, and years, as described later. Command, standard day command, standard month command, standard year command) are provided independently (see FIG. 14B described later). Thereby, the production control microcomputer 800 can sequentially acquire the standard value data of each of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years according to the type of the received standard date / time command (see FIG. 14).

  The production control microcomputer 800 analyzes the MODE data and the EXT data of the received standard date / time command, and determines that the received command is a standard date / time command, which of the second, minute, hour, day of the week, day, month, year. RTCM100 specifies whether standard value data is to be displayed, and the standard date and time (second, minute, hour, day of the week, day, month, year) indicated by the standard date and time command, and the standard value data indicated by the standard date and time command. By changing the time value of the RTCM 100 based on the setting of the time value of the RTCM 100, the time value of the RTCM 100 is set to an accurate time value. For example, the standard date and time commands from the standard date and time data output device 300 are sequentially transmitted in the order of second, minute, hour, day of the week, day, day, month, and year. By receiving the standard date / time command, the time value data (year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second) of the RTCM 100 is converted into the standard value data based on the standard value data indicated by the standard date / time command. Is set.

  Further, when the setting of the time value of the RTCM 100 using the standard date / time data output device 300 is completed, a notification indicating that the setting of such a time value has been completed (for example, the change display device 9 indicates such a fact). Notification for displaying a message is performed.

  After the setting of the time value of the RTCM 100 using the standard date / time data output device 300 is completed, the connector of the signal lines L11 to L19 is disconnected from the connector 801, and the connector of the signal lines L1 to L9 for effect control command is reattached. This makes it possible to perform effect control of the variable display device 9 and the like based on the effect control command.

  Such a standard date / time data output device 300 is a device that is used to set the time count value of the RTCM 100 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an accurate value. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced into a game arcade ( When the time value of the RTCM 100 needs to be adjusted, such as when the time value of the RTCM 100 is distorted in the pachinko machine 1 after being installed in the game hall, etc., the pachinko machine 1 Connected and used.

  The standard date / time data output device 300 may have any configuration as long as it can transmit a standard date / time command. For example, the standard date / time data output device 300 may have the following configuration. The standard date / time data output device 300 may have, for example, a function in which the real-time clock unit 302 automatically adjusts the timekeeping value to Japan standard time based on time information included in radio waves of FM broadcasting. It may have a function of automatically adjusting the timekeeping value to Japan standard time based on time information included in satellite radio waves of Positioning System). In the standard date / time data output device 300, for example, the real-time clock unit 302 does not have a function of automatically adjusting the timekeeping value to Japan standard time, and a person operates the operation unit 304 to input standard time data. The time value may be adjusted to the Japanese standard time based on what is done.

  The standard date / time command is a 2-byte data delimited by 1 byte to indicate either year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second. Second, minute, hour, day of the week, day In this example, data for month, year, and year are sent in multiple commands. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the standard date and time command may indicate all of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years by continuous data of a plurality of bytes. That is, data of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years may be transmitted together in one command. In addition, since it is generally within a certain range such as the range of seconds, minutes, and hours after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the amusement hall, Only a part indicating a certain range such as, minute, hour is used, and only a part of the time value of the RTCM 100 (for example, second, minute, hour) is set based on the standard date / time command. Also good.

  When the configuration using the serial signal line as the signal line for transmitting the effect control command as described above is adopted, the signal line for transmitting the standard date / time command from the standard date / time data output device 300 to the effect control microcomputer 800. However, it is necessary to use a serial signal line.

  The standard date and time commands are not limited to sending standard date and time commands in the order of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years. The standard date / time command may be transmitted with the.

  Next, detailed circuit configurations of the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing detailed circuit configurations of the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35.

  As described above, the effect control board 80 includes the VDP 88, the character ROM 89, and the VRAM 83 in addition to the effect control microcomputer 800. The VDP 88 is a processing device having a display control function for performing image display and a high-speed drawing function, and performs display control of the variable display device 9. The character ROM 89 is a storage means for storing image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 in advance. The CPU 86 transmits control data for displaying an image according to the display control command to the VDP 88 according to the received effect control command. Then, the VDP 88 reads necessary data from the character ROM 89 in order to display an image according to the control data thus transmitted.

  The VDP 88 has a two-dimensional address space independent of the CPU 86, and the VRAM 83 is mapped there. The VDP 88 generates image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 according to the image data in the character ROM 89, and the VDP 88 expands the image data in the VRAM 83. A VRAM 83 is a frame buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP 88. The image data developed in the VRAM 83 is output to the variable display device 9.

  An audio ROM 71, an audio IC 72, and an output circuit 73 are mounted on the audio output board 70. The voice ROM 71 stores voice data including data for generating sounds such as voice and sound effects. The output circuit 73 outputs an audio signal for generating sound from the speaker 27 to the speaker 27. The sound IC 72 reads sound data instructed by the sound control signal from the sound ROM 71 in accordance with the sound control signal given from the effect control microcomputer 800, and generates sound from the speaker 27 according to the sound data. Control is performed to output an audio signal from the output circuit 73 toward the speaker 27.

  The lamp driver board 35 is a lamp as a driver circuit for driving various light emitting means such as a prize ball lamp 51, a ball break lamp 52, a decoration lamp 25, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c. A driver circuit 351 is mounted. The lamp driver circuit 351 drives the various light emitting means by amplifying the drive signal from the effect control microcomputer 800 and outputting it to the various light emitting means.

  Further, the RTCM 100, the clock circuit 353, the RAM 354, the setting operation unit 355, and the backup power supply circuits 356 and 357 are mounted on the lamp driver board 35. The RTCM 100 is a device that measures time to indicate the current “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”. The clock circuit 353 is a circuit that generates a clock pulse signal using a crystal oscillator, and supplies the clock pulse signal to the RTCM 100. Note that the clock circuit 353 may be provided inside the RTCM 100 as well as provided outside the RTCM 100 as shown in FIG.

  The RAM 354 is a storage unit configured using, for example, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory), and stores various information related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The RAM 354 is connected to the effect control microcomputer 800, and stored information is managed by the effect control microcomputer 800. Information stored in the RAM 354 is written by the effect control microcomputer 800 and read by the effect control microcomputer 800.

  The backup power supply circuit 356 is a power supply circuit that supplies backup power for operating the RTCM 100 and the clock circuit 353 when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply circuit 357 is a power supply circuit that supplies backup power for backing up data stored in the RAM 354 when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. With such backup power supply from the backup power supply circuit 356, the RTCM 100, the clock circuit 353, and the RAM 354 are each supplied with power by operating the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during off-hours of the game hall. Even when it is shut off, it is in an operating state, and various operations such as a timing operation are executed. In addition, due to the supply of backup power from the backup power supply circuit 357, the RAM 354 is in an operating state even when the power supply is interrupted by the operation of the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as outside the business hours of the game hall. Since the stored data is backed up, the stored data does not disappear.

  In addition, the setting operation unit 355 can perform various setting operations such as an operation for setting information used for displaying various types of information on the variable display device 9 and an operation for setting various types of information regarding the RTCM 100. Input operation means. The setting operation unit 355 is provided in a manner that the player cannot operate. The operation signal of the setting operation unit 355 is input to the effect control microcomputer 800. Further, the signal output from the selection button 358 is input to the lamp driver board 35, then passes through a signal path formed on the lamp driver board 35, and is output from the lamp driver board 35 to produce an effect control micro signal. Input to computer 800. The signal output from the selection button 358 may be input to the effect control microcomputer 800 without going through the lamp driver board 35.

  Next, the configuration of the RTCM 100 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RTCM 100. The RTCM 100 includes a register circuit 101, a clock input circuit 102, a clock output circuit 103, an interrupt output circuit 104, a data input / output circuit 105, and a control circuit 106.

  The RTCM 100 implements a clock / calendar function, a fixed-cycle timer interrupt function, an alarm interrupt function, and a clock output function by these circuits. The clock / calendar function is a function that counts the year (year), month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second. The fixed-cycle timer interrupt function is a function that generates a periodic interrupt event at an arbitrary time period. The alarm interrupt function is a function for generating an interrupt event at a set time such as day, day, hour, minute. A special effect and other effects as described later may be performed using at least one of the fixed-cycle timer interrupt function and the alarm interrupt function. For example, an interrupt function is set so that a special effect is executed every 3 hours from Monday to Friday, and an interrupt function is set so that a special effect is executed every hour on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays. Also good. The clock output function is a function for outputting a clock signal (clock pulse for external supply) set to a predetermined frequency to the outside of the RTCM 100.

  The clock input circuit 102 is an input circuit including a frequency divider. The clock input circuit 102 divides the clock signal (clock pulse for time measurement) input from the clock circuit 353 described above, and uses the RTCM 100 as a source clock signal having a predetermined frequency. To supply. The register circuit 101 includes various registers, and stores data used to realize a clock / calendar function, a fixed-cycle timer interrupt function, an alarm interrupt function, and a clock output function.

  The register circuit 101 includes a frequency output setting register unit 1010, a clock / calendar counter unit 1020, an alarm register unit 1030, a timer register unit 1040, a control register unit 1050, and a shift register unit 1060.

  The frequency output setting register unit 1010 stores data used to control the clock signal to be output when it is necessary to supply (output) a clock signal having a predetermined frequency from the clock output circuit 103 to the outside. A register 1011 is included. The frequency output setting register 1011 sets (stores) data used for output control of the clock signal such as data indicating the frequency of the clock signal output from the clock output circuit 103. In the frequency output setting register 1011, various data such as frequency selection data for selecting a frequency when the clock signal is output to the outside is set.

  The clock output circuit 103 generates a clock signal having a predetermined frequency based on the clock signal received from the clock input circuit 102 in response to a request from the production control microcomputer 800, and supplies (outputs) the clock signal to the outside of the RTCM 100. Circuit. The clock output circuit 103 receives a clock signal from the clock input circuit 102, and receives a clock output request signal for indicating whether or not to output the clock signal from the production control microcomputer 800. For example, the clock output circuit 103 outputs the clock signal. A control signal for controlling the clock signal such as control and frequency control of the clock signal is input from the control circuit 106. Then, the control circuit 106 monitors whether or not the clock output request signal input to the clock output circuit 103 requests output of the clock signal. In accordance with the control signal, the clock output circuit 103 outputs a clock signal having the frequency set in the frequency output setting register 1011.

  The clock / calendar counter unit 1020 receives a clock signal from the clock input circuit 102 and counts the year (year), month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second based on the clock signal. It includes a plurality of registers used for this purpose. The count values of year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second by the clock / calendar counter unit 1020 are used as time values by the RTCM 100. The clock / calendar counter unit 1020 includes a second register 1021, a minute register 1022, an hour register 1023, a day register 1024, a day register 1025, a month register 1026, and a year register 1027.

  The second register 1021 increments the count value by one every time one second is counted by an internal counter (not shown) provided in the timepiece / calendar counter unit 1020 based on the clock signal input from the clock input circuit 102. It is a register that stores data for counting seconds by incrementing and updating. The second register 1021 counts from 00 seconds to 59 seconds, such as 00 seconds, 01 seconds,... 59 seconds, 00 seconds, 01 seconds,. Repeat counting from 00 seconds. The minute register 1022 is a register that stores data for counting minutes by incrementing and updating the count value by 1 every time the second count value by the second register 1021 becomes 00 seconds and the carry is carried. The minute register 1022 counts from 00 minutes to 59 minutes, such as 00 minutes, 01 minutes,..., 59 minutes, 00 minutes, 01 minutes,.

  The hour register 1023 is a register that stores data for counting time by incrementing and updating the count value by 1 every time the minute count value by the minute register 1022 is carried. The hour register 1023 counts from 00 o'clock to 23 o'clock, such as 00 o'clock, 01 o'clock,. Repeat counting from 00 o'clock.

  The day register 1024 is a register for indicating the day of the week associated with the bit set to “1” by setting any one of 7 bits of 0 to 6 bits to “1”. The day register 1024 sequentially updates the bits set to “1” out of 7 bits of 0 to 6 bits each time the count value of the hour by the hour register 1023 is carried, thereby obtaining the data for counting the day of the week. Remember. In the day register 1024, “1” is added every time the count value of the hour is incremented, such as 01h Sunday (Sunday), 02h Monday (Monday)... 40h Sunday (Saturday), 01h Sunday (Sunday). When the eighth bit is counted and the eighth bit is counted, the count is returned to the initial value and the count is repeated.

  The day register 1025 is a register for storing data for counting the day by incrementing and updating the count value by 1 each time the hour count value by the hour register 1023 is carried. In the day register 1025, 01 day, 02 day,..., 30 day, 01 day, etc., the days from 01 to the end of the month (January, March, May, July, August, and December are It counts until the 31st, April, June, September, and November 30th, the regular year (years other than the leap year) February 28th, and the leap year February 29th), then the last day of the month When the next day comes, carry up and repeat counting from 01st.

  The month register 1026 is a register that stores data for counting the month by incrementing and updating the count value by 1 each time the day count value by the day register 1025 is carried. The month register 1026 counts from January to December, such as 01, 02,..., December, 01,..., And then carries a carry when it becomes the next month of December. Repeat the count from January.

  The year register 1027 is a register that stores data for counting the year by incrementing and updating the count value by 1 each time the month count value by the month register 1026 is carried. The year register 1027 counts from 00 to 99, such as 00, 01,..., 99, 00, and so on. Repeat.

  In the clock / calendar counter unit 1020, based on the count values indicated by the second register 1021, the minute register 1022, the hour register 1023, the day register 1024, the day register 1025, the month register 1026, and the year register 1027, the year (year) ), Month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second. Then, based on operating the setting operation unit 355 at an arbitrary timing such as at the time of manufacture or installation at a game hall, the second register 1021, the minute register 1022, the hour register 1023, the day register 1024, the day register 1025, month register 1026, and year register 1027 are set to the current year (western calendar), month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second, thereby initializing the current year (western calendar) , Month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second can be counted correctly. Further, the clock / calendar counter unit 1020 changes the setting of the count value of each register based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355 even after the initial setting of the count value. , Month, day, day of the week, hour, minute and second can be adjusted.

  The alarm register unit 1030 includes a plurality of registers used for generating an interrupt event called an alarm interrupt event on a set day, day, hour, minute, or the like. The alarm register unit 1030 includes a minute alarm register 1031, an hour alarm register 1032, a day alarm register 1033, and a day alarm register 1034.

  The minute alarm register 1031 is a register for storing data for setting “minute” in the timing of generating the alarm interrupt event. The hour alarm register 1032 is a register for storing data for setting “hour” out of the times when the alarm interrupt event is generated. The day-of-week alarm register 1033 is a register that stores data for setting “day of the week” among the times when an alarm interrupt event is generated. The day alarm register 1034 is a register that stores data for setting the “day” among the times when the alarm interrupt event is generated.

  Based on performing a predetermined operation at the above-described setting operation unit 355 at an arbitrary timing, the time when the alarm interrupt event is generated is set to the minute alarm register 1031, hour alarm register 1032, day alarm register 1033, and date. The alarm register 1034 can be set. In the alarm register unit 1030, based on the values indicated by the minute alarm register 1031, hour alarm register 1032, day alarm register 1033, and day alarm register 1034, the time (day, Day, hour, minute).

  The control register unit 1050 includes a plurality of registers used for setting and executing various controls performed to realize a clock / calendar function, a fixed-cycle timer interrupt function, an alarm interrupt function, and a clock output function. Including. The registers of the control register unit 1050 include a first control register 1051 and a second control register 1052.

  The first control register 1051 holds an event generation detection result for each of an alarm interrupt event and a fixed-cycle timer interrupt event, which will be described later, and settings for the operation of the interrupt signal when the event occurs (interrupt signal). This is a register for storing data used for controlling an interrupt event such as whether to output or not. The second control register 1052 is used to stop and restart the timing operation, reset the count value (internal counter value) for less than 1 second, and temporarily stop and restart the register update operation of the clock / calendar counter unit 1020. It is a register for storing data used for predetermined control.

  In the control circuit 106, the current time data indicating the current day, day, hour, and minute values counted by the clock / calendar counter unit 1020 and the alarm register unit 1030 are set to generate an alarm interrupt event. Alarm time data indicating the time such as day, day, hour, minute, etc. is monitored, and it is determined whether or not they match. The interrupt output circuit 104 is configured to generate an alarm interrupt signal indicating that an alarm interrupt event is generated based on a control signal from the control circuit 106 and a fixed-period interrupt indicating that a fixed-period interrupt event described later is generated. This is a circuit for selecting one of the embedded signals and outputting the selected signal to the outside of the RTCM 100. The control circuit 106 interrupts the alarm interrupt signal on condition that the first control register 1051 is set to output an alarm interrupt signal when the current time data and the alarm time data match. The output from the input / output circuit 104 is controlled.

  The timer register unit 1040 includes a plurality of registers used for generating an interrupt event called a fixed-cycle interrupt event with a set cycle. The timer register unit 1040 includes a timer setting register 1041 and a timer count register 1042 as registers.

  The timer setting register 1041 is a register for setting a cycle for generating a periodic interrupt event. The timer count register 1042 counts (decreases) a time corresponding to the period set by the timer setting register 1041 every time it is confirmed that one second has elapsed based on the clock signal input from the clock input circuit 102. This is a register for counting.

  Based on a predetermined operation in the setting operation unit 355 described above at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to set a cycle for generating a fixed-cycle interrupt event in the timer setting register 1041.

  In the control circuit 106, it is determined whether or not the timer count register 1042 has counted (down counted) the time corresponding to the period set by the timer setting register 1041. When the control circuit 106 determines that the time corresponding to the previously set cycle has been counted, the first control register 1051 is set to output a fixed cycle interrupt signal. Control for outputting an interrupt signal from the interrupt output circuit 104 is performed.

  The shift register unit 1060 includes a shift register 1061. The shift register 1061 writes data from outside the RTCM 100 to each of the frequency output setting register unit 1010, the clock / calendar counter unit 1020, the alarm register unit 1030, the timer register unit 1040, and the control register unit 1050. These registers are used for serially transferring data when data is input and when data is output from these registers to the outside of the RTCM 100. The shift register unit 1060 receives data from the frequency output setting register unit 1010, the clock / calendar counter unit 1020, the alarm register unit 1030, the timer register unit 1040, and the control register unit 1050 via the data bus 1070. Bi-directional transfer.

  The data input / output circuit 105 is a circuit for serially inputting / outputting data to / from the registers in the register circuit 101 in response to a request from the production control microcomputer 800. The data input / output circuit 105 receives an input / output request signal for requesting input / output of data from the effect control microcomputer 800. In the data input / output circuit 105, a data input / output clock signal is input from the effect control microcomputer 800.

  Further, the data input / output circuit 105 receives writing (input) data (serial data) or reading (output) data (serial data) from the effect control microcomputer 800.

  As data for writing, there are mode data for designating a data writing mode, address data for designating an address (register address) for writing data, and write data for writing to the address. The data is input serially from the effect control microcomputer 800 to the data input / output circuit 105. The control circuit 106 monitors the input / output request signal and data input to the data input / output circuit 105, and selects and selects the address of the register specified by the address data when the mode data indicates the write mode. Control is performed to write the write data output to the bus 1070 via the shift register unit 1060 at the address.

  Such data writing is performed based on the fact that a person performs an operation for writing data using the setting operation unit 355 or that the production control microcomputer 800 receives the above-described standard date / time command. This can be done by providing an output request signal and data for writing from the production control microcomputer 800 to the RTCM 100.

  For example, when a standard second command is received as a standard date / time command, a data input / output request signal and a standard second data indicated by the standard second command are written to the second register 1021 of the clock / calendar counter unit 1020. Data is input from the production control microcomputer 800 to the data input / output circuit 105 of the RTCM 100. In this case, the write data includes mode data for designating a data write mode, address data for designating an address (second register 1021 address) to which data is written, and write data to be written to the address. Embedded data (standard second data indicated by the standard second command). When such data for writing is input, the control circuit 106 selects the address of the register (address of the second register 1021) specified by the address data input to the data input / output circuit 105, and selects the selected address. Control can be performed to write the write data (standard second data indicated by the standard second command) to the address. Thereby, the count value of the second register 1021 is set to the standard second by being rewritten to the standard second data.

  In addition, when a standard minute command other than the standard second command, a standard time command, a standard day command, a standard day command, a standard month command, and a standard year command are received as standard date and time commands, As when received, the data input / output request signal and the data indicated by the received standard date / time command (standard minute data, standard time data, standard day data, standard day data, standard month data, or standard year data) For writing to the corresponding register (the minute register 1022, the hour register 1023, the day register 1024, the day register 1025, the month register 1026, or the year register 1027) of the clock / calendar counter unit 1020 However, RTCM100 data from the production control microcomputer 800 Is input to the output circuit 105. In this case, the data for writing includes mode data for designating the data writing mode, and an address (minute register 1022, hour register 1023, day register 1024, day register 1025, month register 1026 for writing data) Or address data designating the year register 1027) and write data to be written to the address (standard minute data indicated by the standard minute command, standard time data indicated by the standard time command, standard day data indicated by the standard day command, Standard date data indicated by the standard date command, standard month data indicated by the standard month command, or standard year data indicated by the standard year command). When such data for writing is input, the control circuit 106 causes the address of the register specified by the address data input to the data input / output circuit 105 (the minute register 1022, the hour register 1023, the day register 1024, The day register 1025, the month register 1026, or the year register address) is selected, and the write data is written to the selected address. As a result, the count value of the designated register is rewritten to the standard value data, thereby setting the standard value data.

  As the data for reading, mode data for designating a data reading mode and address data for designating an address (register address) for reading data are serially input / output from the production control microcomputer 800. Input to the circuit 105. The control circuit 106 monitors the input / output request signal and data input to the data input / output circuit 105, selects the address of the register designated by the address data when the mode data indicates the read mode, and selects the selected address Is read out and output to the bus 1070, the read data is input to the data input / output circuit 105 via the shift register unit 1060, and serially output from the data input / output circuit 105 to the effect control microcomputer 800. Control to do. For such data reading, the data input / output request signal and the data for reading are automatically given to the RTCM 100 when the production control microcomputer 800 is necessary for production control, and a person operates the setting operation unit. The data input / output request signal and the data for reading are supplied from the effect control microcomputer 800 to the RTCM 100 based on the operation for reading the data by 355.

  Here, when a data input / output request signal and data for reading are given to the RTCM 100 based on an operation for reading data by the setting operation unit 355, for example, in the following cases Is included. When a person such as a game shop clerk wants to confirm the current time value of the RTCM 100, the time value data is read from the RTCM 100 based on an operation for reading the data by the setting operation unit 355, and the variable display device 9 can be displayed. Further, when it is desired to check the values of various registers used to realize the above-described fixed-cycle timer interrupt function, alarm interrupt function, and clock output function, an operation for reading data by the setting operation unit 355 is performed. On the basis of this, the time value data can be read from the RTCM 100 and displayed on the fluctuation display device 9.

  Next, a random counter as numerical value updating means for updating numerical data to generate random numbers used for control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a random counter used by the game control microcomputer 560 to generate random numbers used for game control. FIG. 8 shows random counters R1 to R6 as an example of the random counter.

  As described above, whether or not to make a big hit (big hit determination) is performed using R1 which is a random value generated by the above-described random number circuit which is a hardware circuit. R2 to R6, which are random numbers used in the above, are generated using numerical values updated by software executed by the game control microcomputer 560. R1 is updated between “0” and “256”.

  When R2 is determined in advance to generate a big hit based on the big hit determination using R1, it is possible to determine which type of big hit of normal big hit or probability variable big hit, It is a numerical data updating means (random counter) for generating a random number used for determining a big hit symbol. R2 is configured to count up from “0” to “4” which is the upper limit thereof, and to count up again from “0”. This R2 is added and updated by 1 every 2 msec.

  When a valid start winning (start winning when the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit number) is detected by the start switch 14a, each of the aforementioned R1 and R2 is extracted accordingly and the stored data is stored. Is stored in the RAM 55. And about R1, in the special symbol normal process mentioned later, the extraction value of R1 memorize | stored in RAM55 in that way is the stage before starting the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol in the special symbol indicator 8 previously determined. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value. In this determination, if they match, it is determined to generate a big hit using the display result of the variable display as the big hit display result, and the control to enter the big hit gaming state described above is performed. If they do not coincide with each other, it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not a big hit (becomes a dismissal display result), and the gaming state does not change. In a low probability state other than the probability variation state, the big hit determination value is set to one numerical value, for example. In a high probability state that is a probabilistic change state, the big hit judgment value is set to a plurality of numerical values (in this case, the big hit judgment value is set so that the numerical order does not become an adjacent numerical value in order to prevent bias in the big hit judgment value. The probability of hitting a jackpot is improved as compared with the low probability state.

  For example, the value of R2 is assigned to and associated with the jackpot type and jackpot symbol type (odd symbols of “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”) as follows. When the value of R2 is “0”, it is determined that the normal big hit and the special big hit symbol is “1”. When the value of R2 is “1”, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot and the special symbol jackpot symbol are “3”. When the value of R2 is “2”, it is determined that the normal big hit and the special big hit symbol is “5”. When the value of R2 is “3”, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is set and that the special symbol jackpot symbol is “7”. When the value of R2 is “4”, it is determined that the normal big hit and the special big hit symbol is “9”. Therefore, according to the extracted value of R2, either a normal big hit or a probable variation big hit is selected and determined (also referred to as a probable variation determination), and a special big hit symbol is also selected and determined. Data indicating the relationship between the value of R2 and the determined type of jackpot gaming state and the type of jackpot symbol is stored in the ROM 54.

  R3 causes the special symbol display 8 to display any type of outlier symbol when it is determined that no big hit is generated by the jackpot determination using R1, that is, when it is determined in advance that it will be out of date. It is a numerical data update means (random counter) for generating a random number used to determine whether or not. R3 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “4”, and then count up again from “0”, and add 1 every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Updated. The value of R3 is allocated and associated with each of the special symbol outlier symbols (“0” symbol and “2, 4, 6, 8” even symbol). R3 is extracted at a predetermined timing before starting the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and the special symbol corresponding to the value of R3 selected by lottery is determined as the off symbol.

  Here, the count-up operation in the remaining interrupt processing time performed in a predetermined random counter such as R3 will be described. The CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 performs various controls by periodically executing interrupt processing. For a certain interrupt processing, after the interrupt processing is executed, the period until the start of the next execution of the interrupt processing is Waiting for interrupt processing. Repeating the random counter addition update process using an infinite loop during the interrupt process surplus time waiting for such interrupt process is called counting up the interrupt process surplus time.

  R4 is a numerical data update means (random) used to generate random numbers used to randomly select and determine a variation pattern that is a variation display pattern of the special symbol display 8 and the variation display device 9 (referred to as variation pattern determination). Counter). R4 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “99”, and count up again from “0”, and once every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Added and updated.

  The variation pattern used for the variation display is a variation pattern determination that defines the relationship between the count value of R4 and a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the counter value extracted from R4 at a predetermined timing such as when the variation of the special symbol starts. The data table is looked up and selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns. Each fluctuation pattern has a predetermined fluctuation display time (the time from the start of fluctuation display until the display result is derived and displayed, also called the fluctuation time). The variable display time is selected and determined. Data that defines the relationship between the count value of R4 and a plurality of types of variation patterns is set in a variation pattern data table stored in the ROM 54.

  Here, the variation pattern data table stored in the ROM 54 will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation pattern data table in the present embodiment, one variation pattern data table is looked up based on the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination described later.

  FIG. 9A is a loss time table that is looked up when the big hit determination result is out of place and the reach determination result is non-reach. The loss time table is determined as a change pattern that is executed by the first shift change pattern having a change time of “10 seconds” when the counter value extracted from R4 is within the range of “0 to 79”. The distribution is set so that the second deviation variation pattern with the variation time of “15 seconds” is determined as the variation pattern to be executed when it is within the range of “˜99”.

  FIG. 9B is a loss reach time table that is looked up when the big hit determination result is out of reach and the reach determination result is reach. The outlier reach time table is determined as a variation pattern to be executed by the first outlier reach variation pattern having a variation time of “30 seconds” when the value of the counter extracted from R4 is within a range of “0 to 9”. The second deviation reach variation pattern having a variation time of “20 seconds” when it is within the range of “10 to 59” is determined as the variation pattern to be executed, and when the variation time is within the range of “60 to 99”, the variation time is “15”. The distribution is set so that the third misalignment reach variation pattern of “second” is determined as the variation pattern to be executed. In this way, in the shift reach table, the third shift reach variation pattern is determined to be the highest, and the second shift reach variation pattern and the first shift reach variation pattern are determined as the variation patterns to be executed. The distribution is set so that the ratio is low.

  FIG. 9C is a jackpot table that is looked up when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. The big hit table is determined as a fluctuation pattern executed by the first big hit reach fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of “40 seconds” when the counter value extracted from R4 is within the range of “0 to 39”. The second big hit reach variation pattern having a variation time of “30 seconds” is determined as a variation pattern to be executed when the variation time is within the range of “40 to 69”, and the variation time of “20 seconds is within the range of“ 70 to 89 ”. The third big hit reach fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern to be executed, and the fourth big hit reach fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of “15 seconds” is determined as the fluctuation pattern to be executed when it is within the range of “90 to 99”. As shown, the distribution is set. As described above, the ratio of determining the first big hit reach fluctuation pattern is the highest in the big hit table, and the second big hit reach fluctuation pattern, the third big hit reach fluctuation pattern, and the fourth big hit reach fluctuation pattern are executed in this order. The distribution is set so that the ratio determined as the variation pattern is low.

  The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern determined by looking up one of the tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C to the effect control microcomputer 800. .

  Returning to FIG. 8, when the variable display device 9 is determined not to generate a big hit by the big hit determination using R 1, that is, when it is determined to be out of play, R 5 is displayed during the variable display. Numerical data update means for reach determination (random counter) for generating a random number used for reach determination for randomly determining whether the reach display mode is formed (hereinafter referred to as outlier reach) or not. ). R5 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “39”, and then count up again from “0”, and add 1 every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Updated. At the stage before determining the variation pattern, the value of R5 is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the extracted value of R5 matches a predetermined reach determination value. If these values match, it is determined that the reach is out of reach, and the reach state is controlled during the variable display where the display result is out of place. On the other hand, when these values do not coincide with each other, it is determined to be out of control, and control is performed not to reach the reach state during the variable display in which the display result is out of date.

  R6 is a numerical data update means (random counter) for generating random numbers used to randomly determine in advance whether or not to generate a hit for the variable display of the normal symbol display 10. R6 is configured to count up from an initial value such as “0”, count up to its upper limit “11”, and then count up again from the initial value such as “0”, and every 2 msec. One is added and updated. When a valid start passage is detected by the gate switch 32a, the R6 random number is extracted and stored in the RAM 55 as passage storage data. Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted value coincides with a predetermined hit determination value at a stage before starting the normal symbol variation display, and if it matches, the normal symbol hit may be generated. The above-described control is performed, and in the case of a mismatch, it is determined to be off and the above-described control is not performed.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of various random counters used by the effect control microcomputer 800 for effect control. FIG. 10 shows, as an example of a random counter, random counters RU-1 to RU-3 for determining decorative symbols for stoppages, random counters RV for determining the contents of effects, and random numbers for determining mission achievement symbols in mission effects described later. A counter RW and a random counter RX for mission addition symbol addition determination are shown.

  RU-1 to RU-3 are numerical value updating means for determining a decorative symbol stop symbol for generating a random number used to randomly determine a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance for the variable display device 9 (random Counter). RU-1 is used to determine the stop symbol of the left symbol. RU-2 is used to determine the stop symbol of the middle symbol. RU-3 is used to determine the stop symbol of the right symbol. For each of RU-1 to RU-3, RU-1 is updated every 33 msec, RU-2 is updated every carry of RU-1, and RU-3 is added and updated every carry of RU-2. 1 is updated from 0 and updated to its upper limit of 99 and then updated again from 0, and RU-2 and RU-3 are updated from 0 and updated to their upper limit of 9 and then again 0 Updated from

  Each of the decorative symbols (left, middle, right) is composed of, for example, 10 symbols from 0 to 9, for example, 0, 1, 2, 7, 7, 9, etc. Fluctuation (update) is displayed according to the arrangement order of symbols. In the symbol determination data table, numerical data for determining a symbol stop symbol is associated with each of a plurality of types of ornament symbols, and the game control microcomputer 560 does not make a big hit in the big hit determination (determination by R1). When it is determined that the detachment is determined as a result of the determination, and it is determined that the reach state is not set by the reach determination, each of the RU-1 to RU-3 is determined at a predetermined timing. The symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is determined as a stop symbol that results in a variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. When the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the symbol of the big hit by chance, correction is performed so that the symbol becomes a loss symbol (for example, correction by shifting the right symbol by one symbol) to stop each symbol. The symbol is determined. In addition, in the case of such a deviation, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number becomes a reach symbol accidentally, it is corrected so as to become a symbol of deviation (for example, correction for shifting the right symbol by one symbol) ) To determine each stop symbol.

  In the case of detachment, a table set so as not to reach (for example, a table set so as to determine the right symbol by the number of differences from the left symbol, and the difference is not distributed to 0. The right symbol may be determined using a table set in this way, a table provided for each left symbol and set so as not to be distributed to the same symbol as the left symbol.

  Further, when it is determined that the reach state is reached by the reach determination, the symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from RU-1 among the random numbers extracted at the above-described timing is reached. The symbols for the left and right decorative symbols forming the state are determined as stop symbols, and the symbol corresponding to the numerical data matching the counter value extracted from RU-2 is determined as the stop symbol for the middle symbol. Also in this case, when the combination of the big hit symbol is accidentally made, each stop symbol is determined by correcting the symbol so that it becomes an off symbol (for example, correcting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  In the case of a detachment and a reach state, a table set so as not to be a jackpot symbol combination (for example, set so that the middle symbol is determined by the difference between the left and right symbols) A table that is set so that the difference number is not distributed to 0, a table that is provided for each of the left and right symbols and is set so that it is not distributed to the same symbols as the left and right symbols) The middle symbol may be determined using.

  Further, when it is determined that the big hit is determined by the big hit determination by the game control microcomputer 560 and the normal big hit is determined by the big hit type / hit symbol determination (determination by R2), a predetermined On the basis of the random numbers extracted from RU-1 at the timing, the variation display results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are randomly determined as combinations of three big hit symbols.

  Specifically, the combination of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is a set of three symbols of either 0 or an even number of decorative symbols. The relationship between the value of RU-1 and the normal jackpot symbol is set in a table stored in the control ROM 84. When it is determined that a normal jackpot is made, either a 0 or an even decorative symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from RU-1 is selected as a normal jackpot symbol using the table, and three of the symbols are selected. The assortment is determined as a jackpot display result with the left, middle and right symbols. In addition, the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the probable bonus jackpot is a set of three of any one of odd-numbered decorative symbols. The relationship between the value of RU-1 and the probability variation big hit symbol is set in a table stored in the control ROM 84. When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is selected, any of odd-numbered decorative symbols corresponding to the random numbers extracted from RU-1 is selected as the probability variation jackpot symbol using the table, and the three combinations of the symbols are selected. Is determined as the jackpot display result with the left, middle and right symbols.

  RV is a numerical data updating means (random counter) for determining the contents of effects for generating random numbers used to randomly determine the contents of various effects performed by the variable display device 9. RV is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “199” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”, and is incremented and updated by 1 every 33 msec.

  The effect control microcomputer 800 looks up the first state table or the second state table, and based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and the counter value extracted from the RV at a predetermined timing. The production content is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, which will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 800 includes a first state table and a second state table according to the time measured by the RTC 100 based on the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Use properly. Here, the first state table and the second state table will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the first state table and the second state table.

  FIG. 11A is a first state table that is looked up when it is determined that the state is the first state based on the time measured value of the RTCM 100. The first state table is the first special outlier reach when the first outlier reach command of FIG. 9B is received and the value of the counter extracted from the RV is within the range of “0 to 189”. Is determined, and the second special off-reach reach is determined within the range of “190 to 199”.

  The first state table is the first special big hit reach when the first big hit reach command in FIG. 9C is received and the value of the counter extracted from the RV is within the range of “0 to 89”. Is determined, and the second special jackpot reach is determined when it is within a range of “90 to 199”. The first state table is the third special jackpot reach when the second jackpot reach command of FIG. 9C is received and the counter value extracted from the RV is within the range of “0 to 89”. Is determined, and the fourth special jackpot reach is determined when it is within the range of “90 to 199”.

  The first status table receives any one of the second miss reach command, the third miss reach command, the third jackpot reach command, the fourth jackpot reach command, the first miss command, and the second miss command. In addition, regardless of the value of the counter extracted from the RV, the type of effect previously associated with the received variation pattern command is determined. For example, when a second miss reach command is received, the second miss reach is determined.

  FIG. 11B is a second state table that is looked up when it is determined that the state is the second state based on the time measured value of the RTCM 100. When the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, the second state table shows the types of effects associated with the received variation pattern command in advance, regardless of the counter value extracted from the RV. Is configured to be determined. For example, when a first off-reach command is received, a first off-reach reach is determined. When the second state table is looked up, the second special outlier reach, the second special big hit reach, and the fourth special big hit reach described above are not determined as the fluctuation patterns. That is, the second special outlier reach, the second special jackpot reach, and the fourth special jackpot reach are special reach selectable in the first state.

  As described above, the production control microcomputer 800 uses any one of the first missed reach command in FIG. 9B, the first big hit reach command, and the second big hit reach command in FIG. 9C as the variation pattern command. In the first state, based on the RV count value, the first and second special outlier reach, the first to fourth special jackpot reach is determined as one of the types of effects, When it is in the second state, it is determined as one of the types of effects among the first special loss reach, the first and third special jackpot reach.

  Among these, even if it is a case where which kind of production is determined among the 1st special losing reach which can be chosen even if it is the 1st state or the 2nd state, and the 1st and 3rd special jackpot reach In the variation display device 9, the same variation display effect (for example, the variation time until reaching reach becomes the same reach until the decorative symbol stops in the middle variation display region that stops last among the three variation display regions. Will be performed in the same way). Specifically, for example, a player can perform a normal reach by performing a reach effect in which a variable display is performed in a special variable display mode that is not performed in a normal reach, such as performing a variable display while blinking a decorative design. An effect in an effect mode that can be clearly distinguished is used.

  Moreover, even if any type of production is determined among the second special outlier reach, the second and fourth special jackpot reach that can be selected only in the first state, The same variation display effect (for example, the variation time until reaching reach is the same, the effect performed after reaching reach is the same until the decorative symbol stops in the middle variation display region that stops last among the three variation display regions ) Is performed. The type of the second special off-reach reach that can be selected in the first state, the second and fourth special big hit reach, and the first special that can be selected in either the first state or the second state It is configured to be different from the production mode of outlier reach, first and third special jackpot reach.

  On the other hand, any one of the first special outlier reach, the first and third special big hit reach is determined as the type of production, the first outlier reach fluctuation pattern in FIG. 9B, the first in FIG. 9C. Of the first big hit reach fluctuation pattern and the second big hit reach fluctuation pattern, the ratio determined when the first big hit reach fluctuation pattern and the second big hit reach fluctuation pattern are determined to be big hits by the big hit determination is third. The ratio determined when the first hit reach fluctuation pattern is determined to be out of the big hit determination is higher than the ratio determined as the fourth big hit reach fluctuation pattern. Is lower than the rate determined. Therefore, the first and second special that can be selected by receiving the first outlier reach fluctuation pattern in FIG. 9B, the first big hit reach fluctuation pattern, and the second big hit reach fluctuation pattern in FIG. 9C. When the fluctuation display by the outlier reach and the first to fourth special big hit reach is performed, it is a big hit than when the variable display is performed by the kind of effect that can be selected by receiving other fluctuation patterns. The expectation which a player has with respect to this can be improved. In the present embodiment, the reach performed in the variable display by the first and second special outlier reach and the first to fourth special big hit reach is referred to as the special reach described above.

  Of the above-described special reach, the second special jackpot reach and the fourth special jackpot reach are determined at a higher ratio than the ratio at which the first special jackpot reach and the third special jackpot reach are determined. Of the above-described special reach, the second special miss reach is determined at a rate lower than the rate at which the first special miss reach is determined. For this reason, among the special reach, especially when the variable display by the second special outreach reach, the second special big hit reach, and the fourth special big hit reach is performed, it is more than when the variable display is performed by other types of effects. However, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for a big hit.

  When the variation display by the first and second special deviation reach is performed, the decorative symbol is stopped in the middle variation display area, the combination of the separation symbols is displayed, and the variation display by the first to fourth special jackpot reach is performed. When the image is displayed, the decorative symbol stops in the middle fluctuation display area and the combination of the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, when the variable display by the first and second special jackpot reach is performed, the combination of the jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then it is notified whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Promotional performance is performed.

  Further, in both cases, when the variable display by the second outlier reach and the third big hit reach is performed, and when the variable display by the third outlier reach and the fourth big hit reach is performed, the variable display device 9, the same variation display effect is performed until the decorative symbol stops in the middle variation display region that stops last among the three variation display regions. When the variation display by the second or third deviation reach is performed, the decorative symbols are stopped in the middle variation display area, the combination of the separation symbols is displayed, and the variation display by the third or fourth big hit reach variation pattern is performed. When the image is displayed, the decorative symbol stops in the middle fluctuation display area and the combination of the big hit symbol is displayed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the first state table and the second state table are selectively used when the production control microcomputer 800 receives all the variation pattern commands. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first state table and the second state for the first outlier reach command, the first big hit reach command, and the second big hit reach command, which are variable pattern commands that may execute special reach. For other variation pattern commands that do not have the possibility of executing special reach, only a common table may be provided and not used according to the time value of the RTCM 100. That is, the table shows the special reach according to the time value of the RTCM 100 when the production control microcomputer 800 receives any one of the first miss reach command, the first jackpot reach command, and the second jackpot reach command. As long as a table that can execute is used separately from a table that cannot execute special reach, any configuration may be used.

  The table shown in FIG. 11 is a table used in a state that is not in the time-short state and is not in the memory variation shortened state, that is, when the variation display time is not shortened. Whether or not the fluctuation display time is shortened is indicated by a fluctuation pattern command. For example, a plurality of shortened variation patterns, which are variation patterns in a state in which the variation display time is shortened, are provided including the variation patterns that reach as described above. Among the fluctuation patterns, the above-described plural kinds of reach fluctuation patterns are also included. When the variable display time is shortened, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the variable display using the same method as in the state where the variable display time is not shortened as described above. The variation pattern is selected from such shortened variation patterns. Corresponding to each of these shortened variation patterns, a variation pattern command is provided, and when a shortened variation pattern is selected, a variation pattern command corresponding to the selected shortened variation pattern is transmitted. Such a shortening variation pattern includes a variation pattern indicating a plurality of types of shortening reach, including special reach during shortening. The production control microcomputer 800 is provided with a data table similar to the table shown in FIG. 11 for the reach at the time of shortening. When the reach at the time of shortening is received, the table is used in the same manner as described above. Then, an effect including an effect of special reach at the time of shortening is selected as an effect at the time of shortening executed by the variable display device 9.

  As described above, whether or not the special reach is set in the variable display is the same as when the variable display time is not shortened and when the variable display time is shortened. The microcomputer 800 selects and decides. The special reach is selected when the variable display time is not shortened, but may not be selected, that is, not executed when the variable display time is shortened.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the RW is a numerical data update means for determining a mission achievement symbol for generating a random number used to determine a mission achievement symbol to be described later to be notified in a mission effect performed as a special effect on the variable display device 9. Random counter). The RW is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “9” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”, and is incremented and updated by 1 every 33 msec.

  RX is a numerical data updating means (random counter) for determining whether or not to add a mission achievement symbol that generates a random number used to determine whether or not to add a mission achievement symbol in a mission effect performed as a special effect in the variable display device 9. ). RX is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “9” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”, and is incremented and updated by 1 every 33 msec.

  Here, the mission effect will be described. The mission effect includes a mission period as an effective period and a predetermined effect selected from a plurality of types of effects (for example, an effect that causes a predetermined reach symbol to appear or an effect that causes a predetermined symbol to appear). As a special bonus that is controlled to a predetermined jackpot gaming state (for example, the type of jackpot presented) It is a dramatic production. Specifically, at the time of mission presentation, the conditions (mission achievement conditions) indicated as issues that can be achieved by the player are selected from a plurality of types of mission achievement conditions and presented to the player. In the fluctuation display, it is shown whether the mission can be achieved (successful). When the mission achievement condition is satisfied and the mission is achieved, the player is controlled in a state advantageous to the player such as a predetermined big hit.

  In this embodiment, as a mission effect, a plurality of types of special effects including a first special effect and a second special effect are provided, and conditions for executing the special effect as described later are established. Sometimes, the type of special effect to be executed is selected in a predetermined selection manner.

  For example, in the first special performance, when a reach occurs in a symbol presented as a mission achievement condition (hereinafter referred to as a mission achievement symbol) in a decorative symbol, a big hit with a combination of symbols including the mission achievement symbol is always given. (When the promotion effect is performed, the jackpot symbol including the mission achievement symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed). In addition, the second special effect is different from the first special effect in the effect mode, and in the variation display of the decorative symbol, when the mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area, the symbol including the mission achievement symbol is always included. It is a mission that is a big hit in combination (when the promotion effect is performed, the big hit symbol including the mission achievement symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed).

  Specifically, within the mission period of the first special effect and the second special effect, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the big hit is determined by the big hit determination using the R1, and the above-mentioned When it is determined by jackpot type determination using R2 that the jackpot of the same type as the jackpot type (one of the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot) when the jackpot is a combination including the mission achievement symbol The mission achievement symbol is displayed (reach is generated or stopped in the left variation display area), and an effect indicating that the mission is achieved can be performed. In the present embodiment, whether or not an effect for achieving the mission is performed is determined by the effect control microcomputer 800. In other words, when the combination of jackpot symbols including the mission accomplishment symbol is determined by the effect control microcomputer 800 as a variable display result (including a temporary stop display result described later), the jackpot is achieved after performing the mission achievement. An effect of displaying a combination of symbols is performed. On the other hand, if the combination of jackpot symbols including the mission accomplishment symbol is not determined as the fluctuation display result (including the temporary stop display result described later) by the effect control microcomputer 800, the effect for achieving the mission is not performed. An effect of displaying a combination of jackpot symbols is performed.

  Also, within the mission period of the first special effect and the second special effect, the type of jackpot determined by the game control microcomputer 560 is different from the type of jackpot when the combination including the mission achievement symbol is a jackpot. Even if it is determined that it will be a big jackpot of the game, when the decision to add the mission achievement symbol is made based on the above-mentioned RX count value, the type of jackpot determined by the game control microcomputer 560 is changed. A corresponding mission achievement symbol is added, and the mission achievement symbol is displayed (reaches are generated or stopped in the left variation display area), and an effect indicating that the mission has been achieved can be performed.

  When the mission is achieved, an announcement other than the effect in which the mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a message effect using characters such as “mission completed”) may be notified.

  Note that the special effect is not limited to the mission effect, but any effect can be used as long as the player can identify that the special effect is being performed, such as performing a special effect. You may make it perform. In addition, the special effect may be always executed during a specific period, or during the specific period, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the special effect by lottery using a random counter. It may be possible to execute a mini game during a specific period, such as executing a mini game and executing it based on the lottery result.

  Next, a project, project advance notice, notification, special effect, state selection switching, and simultaneous operation performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13.

  In this embodiment, the project refers to a plan for changing the display mode of effects and the like on the variable display device 9 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a specific date (first date) is reached. The project notice is displayed at a specific date and time, for example, using the variable display device 9 when the date and time (second date and time) before a specific period of time when the above-mentioned project is executed is reached. This refers to performing a notice effect informing that the mode is changed.

  Further, the state selection switching refers to switching between the first state and the second state at a predetermined time in order to switch the selection target of the effect to be executed when reaching in the variable display of decorative symbols. Specifically, in the state selection switching, the table used for selecting the reach effect is changed on a predetermined day of the week. Further, the notification is that the game hall (game shop) where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed notifies the player of various information related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the game hall using, for example, the variable display device 9. That means. The special effect means a special effect in which the mission effect as described above is performed.

  Further, the simultaneous operation means that a predetermined operation is simultaneously performed on all the pachinko gaming machines 1 on the gaming machine installation island where a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed. Specifically, in each of the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the gaming machine installation island, the timing for executing the simultaneous operation is set as shown in FIG. The machine 1 determines whether or not it is time to execute the simultaneous operation, and at that time, the predetermined operation set as the simultaneous operation is executed, so that a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 Predetermined operations are executed all at once.

  The simultaneous operation includes a simultaneous demonstration display that performs a predetermined demonstration display (hereinafter, abbreviated as “demo display”) at a predetermined timing (including the time during business hours) at amusement halls. In addition, there is a simultaneous production that performs a predetermined production at a predetermined timing (including a timing outside business hours) such as during business hours of a game hall. Note that the simultaneous demonstration display is not limited to outside business hours, but may be performed at a timing within business hours. Moreover, simultaneous production may be performed not only during business hours but also at timings outside business hours.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing, in a tabular form, various data tables provided for performing a project, project notice, notification, special effect, state selection switching, and simultaneous operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing in tabular form the types of effects used in the variable display in the variable display device 9.

  In FIG. 12, (a) is an operation period-specific effect selection information table, (b) is a state selection information table, (c) is a project execution information table, (d) is a project notice information table, and (e) is announcement information. A table, (f) shows a special effect information table, and (g) shows a simultaneous operation information table. Such various data tables are set with default values of various data when the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered based on the programs and data for creating these data tables stored in the control ROM 84. The produced various data tables are generated by the production control microcomputer 800, and the data tables are generated by being stored in the RAM 354 of the lamp driver board 35. As described above, the various data tables stored in the RAM 354 can change various data such as the above-described default values based on the data input from the setting operation unit 355. The RAM 354 backs up the stored data with the backup power from the backup power supply circuit 357 as described above even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not supplied. Stored data never disappears.

  As for these various data tables, the data of the data table that is the prototype of the data table is stored in the control ROM 84, and the data is transferred from the control ROM 84 to the RAM 354 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. You may make it produce by writing various data in a data table. In this case, various data stored in a predetermined storage medium may be prepared, and the data stored in the storage medium may be transferred to the RAM 354 and written in the data table.

  The performance selection information table by operation period shown in (a) classifies the operation period, which is the time elapsed from the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1, into several periods, and selects an effect by the classified operation period. It is a data table used for the project. In the operation period-specific effect selection information table, the relationship between the operation periods classified into a plurality of periods and the types of effects (effect modes) selected during each operation period is shown. In (a), a part of data in the data table is shown as a representative example.

  The operation period is, for example, June 1, 2006 as the operation start date and time, and the first operation period from the operation start date and time to the third week (June 1, 2006 to June 22, 18:00) The second operation period from the operation start date to the fourth week to the sixth week (June 22, 2006 18:00 to July 13, 18:00), the seventh operation from the operation start date To the third operation period from the first week to the ninth week (July 13, 2006, 18:00 to August 3, 18:00) and from the operation start date and time to the tenth week to the twelfth week It is classified into a plurality of periods such as a fourth operation period (August 3, 2006, 18:00 to August 24, 18:00).

  In the first operation period, the effect type A1 is selected and the effect is executed. In the second operation period, the effect type B1 different from the effect type A is selected and the effect is executed. In the third operation period, the effect type A2 or the effect type B2 can be selected according to the player's selection operation, and an effect based on the effect type selected from these is executed. In the fourth operation period, the effect type A3, the effect type B3, or the effect type C1 can be selected according to the player's selection operation, and an effect based on the effect type selected from these is executed. As described above, when a predetermined operation period elapses, the effect types can be selected in accordance with the player's selection operation, and the number of effect types that the player can select increases as the operation period increases. Data is set as follows.

  Here, the kind of effects as described above will be described. In FIG. 13, the effect type name and the effect content are shown in association with each other. The effect types in this case include a basic screen that is a basic image such as a symbol and a background displayed on the variable display device 9, and an effect image that is displayed when variable display such as effects is performed. The group of the production types A1 to A4, the group of the production types B1 to B4, and the group of the production types C1 to C4 are production groups of production modes having different production categories. Mountain production groups including production images are production types A1 to A4, and basic screens that make the image of the sea and groups of sea productions that contain production images are production types B1 to B4. The group of the city effects including is the effect types C1 to C4.

  In addition, the relevance of effects in the groups of effect types A1 to A4 is as follows. The production type A1 is composed of the production contents of the mountain production 1 including the basic screen and the production image that image the spring mountain. The production type A2 is composed of the production contents of the mountain production 2 including the basic screen and the production image that image the summer mountain. The production type A3 is composed of the production contents of the mountain production 3 including the basic screen and the production image that image autumn mountains. The production type A4 is composed of the production contents of the mountain production 4 including the basic screen and the production image that image the winter mountain. In this way, the production types A1 to A4 are related to production by a story such as the transition of the four seasons in the mountains.

  In addition, the relevance of effects in the groups of effect types B1 to B4 is as follows. The production type B1 is composed of the production contents of the sea production 1 including the basic screen and the production image that image the spring sea. The production type B2 is composed of the production contents of the sea production 2 including the basic screen and the production image that image the summer sea. The effect type B3 is composed of the effect contents of the sea effect 3 including the basic screen and the effect image that image the autumn sea. The production type B4 is composed of the production contents of the sea production 4 including the basic screen and the production image that image the winter sea. In this way, the production types B1 to B4 are related to production by a story such as the change of the seasons of the sea.

  Further, the relevance of effects in the groups of effect types C1 to C4 is as follows. The production type C1 is composed of the production contents of the city production 1 including the basic screen and the production image that image the city of spring. The production type C2 is composed of the production contents of the city production 2 including the basic screen and the production image that image a summer town. The production type C3 is composed of the production contents of the city production 3 including the basic screen and the production image that image the autumn city. The production type C4 is composed of the production contents of the city production 4 including the basic screen and the production image that image a winter town. In this way, the production types C1 to C4 have relevance in production due to the story nature such as the transition of the city's four seasons.

  The production types A1 to A4 are selectively used in such a manner that the four seasons of the mountain due to the production change in the order of spring, summer, autumn and winter as time passes from the start of operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. be called. For example, in FIG. 12A, the production type A1 is used in the first operation period, the production type A2 is used in the third operation period, the production type A3 is used in the fourth operation period, and illustration is omitted. However, the production type A4 is set to be used in the subsequent operation period.

  The production types B1 to B4 are selectively used in such a manner that the four seasons of the sea according to the production change in the order of spring, summer, autumn and winter with the passage of time from the start of operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. be called. For example, in FIG. 12A, the effect type B1 is used in the second operation period, the effect type B2 is used in the third operation period, the effect type B3 is used in the fourth operation period, and illustration is omitted. However, the production type B4 is set to be used in the subsequent operation period.

  The production types C1 to C4 are selectively used in such a manner that the four seasons of the town in the production change in the order of spring, summer, autumn and winter as time passes from the start of operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. be called. For example, in FIG. 12A, the effect type C1 is used in the fourth operation period and the illustration is omitted, but the effect types C2 to C4 are sequentially used in the subsequent operation periods. Yes.

  Further, in the third operation period including the mountain production type A2 and the sea production type B2, and in the subsequent fourth operation period including the mountain production type A3 and the sea production type B3, the mountain production type A2 and the mountain production type. The production type is set so that the production style is related to A3 by the relevance of the story of the mountain production, and the production style is related to the sea production type B2 and the sea production type B3 by the relevance of the story of the sea production. Has been. In addition, in the operation period before and after in this way, in the case of having the relevance of the production mode, it is only necessary to provide the relevance for at least two production modes. For example, the mountain production type, the sea production type, and You may give relevance about three or more production | presentation aspects, such as a town production type. Further, only the mountain production type A1 is performed during the first operation period, only the sea production type B1 is performed during the second operation period, only the mountain production type A2 is performed during the third operation period, and the sea production type B2 is performed during the fourth operation period. The production mode is related by the relevance of the story of the mountain production between the first operation period and the third operation period, and between the second operation period and the fourth operation period, You may make it set the data of the production | presentation selection table classified by operation period so that a production | presentation aspect may be related by the relevance of the story of a production | presentation. In this way, when the production modes are related before and after the period, the first operation period is the first day, the second operation period is the second day, the third operation period is the third day, and the fourth operation period. The operation period may be in units of one day so that is the fourth day. In addition, in the case where the production mode is related before and after the period, the first day and the second day are the first period, the third day and the fourth day are the second period, and before and after the period. You may make it make an effect form relate.

  Production control data for performing control for displaying the basic screen and the production image according to such production types is stored in the control ROM 84, and image data for displaying such a basic screen and production image is stored in the character ROM 89. The data is stored, and these data are selectively used according to the operation period from the operation start date and time.

  In the effect control microcomputer 800, data and a program for automatically creating an effect selection information table by operation period based on the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored in the control ROM 84, and the program and data Thus, when the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, the data shown in FIG. 12A is set as the default value based on the registered operation start date and time. A selection information table is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354. For example, data for calculating each operation period by calculation based on the operation start date and time is set as default value setting data. When each operation period is calculated using the default value setting data, (a ) Is set as the default value for each operation period. The contents of such an operation period-specific effect selection information table can be arbitrarily changed based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355. In addition, when the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, a production selection information table by operation period for which no data is set is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354, and then set by the store clerk of the game hall Based on the operation of the operation unit 355, the contents of the operation period-specific effect selection information table may be arbitrarily set (stored in the RAM 354). Further, the contents of such an operation period-specific effect selection information table can be newly created based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355.

  Further, there are a plurality of types of basic screens and effect images such as symbols and background images displayed on the variable display device 9 corresponding to a plurality of effect types, but image data for displaying the basic screen and the effect image is Are stored in the character ROM 89. And presentation control data such as a data table for selecting those image data is stored in the control ROM 84.

  Further, effect type selection data that is data indicating which effect type is selected from among a plurality of effect types is stored in the RAM 354. For example, in the first operating period described above, data indicating the effect type A1 is stored as effect type selection data. In the second operation period described above, data indicating the effect type B1 is stored as effect type selection data. In the third operation period described above, data indicating the effect types A2 and B2 is stored as effect type selection data. In the above-described fourth operation period, data indicating the effect types A3, B3, and C1 is stored as effect type selection data.

  In the effect control microcomputer 800, immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect type selection data stored in the RAM 354 is confirmed, the effect type indicated by the effect type selection data is selected, and the effect control of the effect type is performed. Data and image data are used in the subsequent production control. However, when the effect type is changed, such as when the project is executed, the effect control microcomputer 800 changes the effect type indicated by the effect type selection data stored in the RAM 354, and the effect after the change is made. The effect type indicated by the type selection data is selected, and the effect control data and the image data of the effect type are used in the subsequent effect control. In that case, for example, when there are a plurality of types of effect indicated by the changed effect type selection data, such as the third operation period and the fourth operation period, a predetermined priority order (for example, mountain effect type, sea According to the order of the production type and the city production type), the production type production control data and image data to be selected first (selected when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated) are selected. In this way, it is possible to select and execute the effect type according to the operation period.

  The state selection information table shown in (b) of FIG. 12 is a data table in which the state selection information used for performing the above-described state selection switching is stored. In the state selection information table, information indicating a table to be selected is stored for each day of the week set and counted by the RTCM 100 at the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a state selection information table, data indicating either the first state table or the second state table is set for each day of the week from Sunday to Monday.

  For each day from Tuesday to Sunday, the above-described second state table is selected and used when determining the type of effect. For Monday, the first state table described above is selected and used when determining the production. As described above, the first state table is a table in which special reach effects can be selected, and the second state table is a table in which special reach effects cannot be selected. Therefore, in this example, the special reach effect can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only on Monday.

  Thus, in the state selection information table, data is set so that special reach can be executed when the time value of the RTCM 100 reaches a predetermined date (for example, Monday). Note that the status selection information table is not limited to indicating which table is selected for each day of the week, and data is stored so that special reach can be executed on one or more days specified in advance in each month. It may be set. For example, when the special reach can be executed every 10 days in each month, the first status table is selected for the 10th, 20th, and 30th in the status selection information table, and the other day is the first. Data may be set to select a two-state table.

  In the production control microcomputer 800, data and a program for automatically creating a state selection information table based on the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored in the control ROM 84, and the pachinko machine is based on the program and data. When the operation start date and time of the gaming machine 1 is registered, a state selection information table in which data as shown in FIG. 12B is set as a default value is automatically generated based on the registered operation start date and time. And stored in the RAM 354. For example, data for setting a period using the first state table and a period using the second state table based on the operation start date / time is set as default value setting data, and the default value setting data is used. When the period for selecting the first state table and the period for selecting the second state table are set, data as shown in FIG. 12B is set as the default value of the data for selecting the table. The contents of the state selection information table can be arbitrarily changed based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355. When the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, a state selection information table in which no data is set is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354, and thereafter, a setting operation unit 355 by a store clerk at the game hall. Based on the above operation, the contents of the state selection information table may be arbitrarily set (stored in the RAM 354). Further, the contents of such a state selection information table can be newly created based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355.

  In the state selection information table shown in FIG. 12B, the day (for example, Monday) for selecting only the first state table and the day for selecting only the second state table (for example, Tuesday to Sunday) are set. An example was provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and special reach can be performed, such as providing a day for selecting the first state table and the second state table at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1 to 2). You may make it provide the day with the low probability that a special reach will be performed rather than the time of selecting only a table.

  The project execution information table shown in (c) of FIG. 12 includes the scheduled date and time (execution date and time) of executing the project based on the operation period effect selection information table shown in (a) of FIG. Information) is a project execution information data table for each project. In FIG. 12C, a part of the data of the project execution information table is shown.

  When the first project is in the second operation period set in the effect selection information table by operation period shown in FIG. 12A (18 on June 22 in the fourth week from the operation start date and time). 0:00), the project type is changed, and the project name “Project 1” is given. When the second project is in the third operation period set in the operation selection information table for each operation period shown in (a) (18:00 on July 13 in the seventh week from the operation start date and time) ) Is a project for changing the production type, and the project name “Project 2” is given. The third project is the fourth operation period set in the operation period-specific effect selection information table shown in (a) (18:00 on August 3, 10th week from the operation start date and time) ) Is a project for changing the production type, and the project name “Project 3” is given.

  In the production control microcomputer 800, data and a program for automatically creating a project execution information table based on the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored in the control ROM 84. When the operation start date and time of the gaming machine 1 is registered, a project execution information table in which data as shown in FIG. 12C is set as a default value is automatically based on the registered operation start date and time. And stored in the RAM 354. For example, data for calculating each operation period based on the operation start date and time is set as default value setting data. When each operation period is calculated using the default value setting data, the data shown in (c) of FIG. The data shown is set as the default value for each operation period. The contents of such a project execution information table can be arbitrarily changed based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355. When the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, a project execution information table in which no data is set is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354, and thereafter, a setting operation unit 355 by a store clerk at the game hall. Based on these operations, the contents of the project execution information table may be arbitrarily set (stored in the RAM 354). Further, the contents of such a project execution information table can be newly created based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355.

  The project notice information table shown in FIG. 12D is a data table of project notice information in which the scheduled date and time for executing the project notice for the project shown in FIG. In (d), some data of the project notice information table is shown.

  The project notice is determined in advance to be performed a plurality of times (in this example, a total of seven notices 1 to 7), and a notice execution date and time is determined for each notice time. The notice execution date and time is set to a date and time that is a predetermined period before the execution date and time, based on the execution date and time of each project. The project notice is executed every day from a predetermined number of days, for example, 4 days ago, 3 days ago, 2 days ago, 1 day ago, and on the day of project execution, 12:00 (6 hours ago), 15:00 ( 3 hours ago) and 17:00 (one hour ago). By performing the project advance notice in this way, the player is notified of the date and time when the project is executed, so that the player can easily recognize the date and time when the project is executed. This allows the player to visit the amusement hall at the date and time known based on the project notice and adjust the schedule so that the game can be played on the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the project is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution can be easily seen.

  The project notice may be executed on a random date and time without setting the notice execution date and time in advance. For example, the determination of whether or not to execute the project notice is performed at a periodic or random timing, and when it is decided to execute the determination in the determination, the timing at which the project notice can be executed (for example, a variable display is performed). The project notice should be executed when the timing is not reached. In that case, the time difference between the current date and time measured by the RTCM 100 and the project execution date and time stored in the project execution information table is obtained, and the project is executed in what days and how many hours based on the time difference. Is displayed on the variable display device 9. Further, the project notice may be executed at a timing after a specific reach is executed, and a demonstration display performed for each pachinko gaming machine 1 at a timing at which a demonstration display as described later is executed, or Alternatively, it may be executed as the above-described simultaneous demonstration display that is simultaneously executed by a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. Here, the demonstration display is the execution timing of the demonstration display in which the variation display device 9 has not performed the symbol variation display for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) or more and the execution time is preset. For example, when a demonstration display execution condition is established, a predetermined demonstration display image as shown in FIG. 15 to be described later is displayed.

  In the production control microcomputer 800, data and a program for automatically creating a project notice information table based on the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored in the control ROM 84. When the operation start date and time of the gaming machine 1 is registered, a project notice information table in which data as shown in FIG. 12D is set as a default value automatically is based on the registered operation start date and time. And stored in the RAM 354. For example, data for calculating the project notice time based on the operation start date and time is set as default value setting data. When the project notice time is calculated using the default value setting data, the data shown in FIG. The data shown is set as the default value for the project notice period. The contents of such a project notice information table can be arbitrarily changed based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355. When the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, a project notice information table in which no data is set is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354, and thereafter, a setting operation unit 355 by a store clerk at the game hall. Based on the above operation, the contents of the project notice information table may be arbitrarily set (stored in the RAM 354). Further, the contents of such a project execution notice table can be newly created based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355.

  The notification information table shown in (e) of FIG. 12 uses the variable display device 9 to notify the player of various types of information related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the game hall, and the type of information to be notified. It is a data table of the notification information which shows the relationship with a day of the week and time. In the notification information table shown in (e) of FIG. 12, today's event notification, store manager push stand announcement, recommended stand announcement, special performance notice, and special reach notice are shown as examples of information to be notified. Today's event notification refers to notification of today's event information, which is information related to various events held today at the game hall. The store manager push stand announcement means that information on the store manager push stand that is information related to the game stand (the pachinko machine 1 stand) recommended by the store manager of the game hall is notified. “Recommended stand” refers to notifying information on a recommended stand, which is information relating to a play stand that the amusement hall recommends to play. The special effect notice means that a special effect is announced by a notice effect that informs in advance that the execution of the special effect described above can be specified. The special reach notice refers to notifying that there is a possibility that special reach will be performed by a notice effect that informs in advance that the execution of the special reach described above can be specified. In the notification information table shown in (e) of FIG. 12, a time for performing notification is set for each day of the week when the game hall is open.

  In the production control microcomputer 800, data and a program for creating a notification information table are stored in the control ROM 84, and each data in the notification information table is stored based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355 by a store clerk in the game hall. The program to be set is stored in the control ROM 84. For example, when the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, as shown in FIG. 12 (e) based on the registered operation start date and time. A notification information table in which data is set as a default value is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354. For example, based on the operation start date and time, data for setting the date and time for performing various notifications is set as default value setting data, and when setting the date and time for performing various notifications using the default value setting data, Data as shown in FIG. 12E is set as the default value of the notification information. Thereafter, the contents of the special effect information table can be arbitrarily changed based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355. When the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, a special effect information table in which no data is set is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354, and thereafter, a setting operation unit 355 by a store clerk in the game hall. Based on the above operation, the contents of the special effect information table may be arbitrarily set (stored in the RAM 354). The contents of the special effect information table can be newly created based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355.

  The special effect information table shown in (f) of FIG. 12 is a data table of special effect information indicating the start and end times of the special effect in which the mission effect as described above is performed for each day of the week. In the special effect information table, information indicating the start and end times of the special effect is stored for each day of the week set and counted by the RTCM 100 at the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the special effect information table shown in (f) of FIG. 12, the relationship between the type of special effect to be executed and the start time and end time is shown for each day of the week. For example, in the special effect information table, the first special effect is set to start twice at 10:00 and 17:00 on every day of the week. These two special effects are set to end after 20 minutes (10:20 and 17:20 are the end times). In addition, in the special effect information table, for Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays, in addition to the first special effect, the second special effect having a different aspect from the first special effect (as described above, the first special effect is The second special effect is an effect in which a specific symbol appears in the left-variable display area as a mission achievement condition, whereas the second special effect is an effect in which a specific reach symbol appears as a mission achievement condition. These effects are different effects. These effects are set to start twice at 12:00 and 15:00. These two special effects are set to end after 20 minutes (12:20 and 15:20 are the end times). Here, for holidays, even if the period falls on Monday to Friday, the setting data for holidays is preferentially applied.

  As described above, for Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays, changes are made to increase the number of executions of special effects per day as compared to Monday to Friday on weekdays. Such a change adds a timing for newly executing the special effect (second special effect) in addition to the timing set in advance for executing the special effect (first special effect) before the change. This is realized by setting. Therefore, since it is clarified that the timing of executing the special effect has increased per day, a game that is considered to be caused by the fact that the special effect is not executed at the timing set in advance to execute the special effect. Can prevent a decline in the interest of the elderly. In addition, when the timing of executing the special performance per day is increased, the production mode differs between the first special production before the change and the second special production after the change. Since it is clarified that the timing for performing the production has increased, and the production mode is rich, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, when changing the number of executions of special effects, the number of executions of special effects is changed every two weeks, such as the number of executions of special effects per week instead of the number of executions of special effects per day. May be performed for the number of executions within a period other than the number of executions of special effects per day. In addition, the special effect information table of FIG. 12F is a table used in common for all days of the week, but is not limited thereto, and the special effect information table is a type of special effect to be executed for Monday to Friday. Etc. (for example, a table in which the first special effect is set to start twice at 10:00 and 17:00 in total), the types of special effects to be executed on Saturday, Sunday, and holidays, etc. (For example, the first special effect is set to start twice in total at 10:00 and 17:00, and the second special effect is set to be started twice in total at 12:00 and 15:00. Two types of tables different from the above table) may be used.

  In the effect control microcomputer 800, data and a program for creating the special effect information table are stored in the control ROM 84, and each of the special effect information table in the special effect information table is based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355 by the game shop clerk. A program for setting data is stored in the control ROM 84. For example, when the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, special data in which data as shown in (f) of FIG. An effect information table is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354. For example, based on the operation start date and time, data for setting a date and time for performing a special effect is set as default value setting data. If the date and time for performing a special effect is set using the default value setting data, FIG. (F) is set as the default value of the special effect information. Thereafter, the contents of the special effect information table can be arbitrarily changed based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355. When the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, a special effect information table in which no data is set is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354, and thereafter, a setting operation unit 355 by a store clerk in the game hall. Based on the above operation, the contents of the special effect information table may be arbitrarily set (stored in the RAM 354). The contents of the special effect information table can be newly created based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355.

  The simultaneous operation information table shown in (g) of FIG. 12 is a data table provided for performing the above-described simultaneous operation. In the simultaneous operation information table, the time for starting execution and the time for ending execution are set for each day of the week when the game hall is open for each of the simultaneous demonstration display and the simultaneous performance. In the case of this embodiment, the time for starting execution and the time for ending execution can be set so that each of the simultaneous demonstration display and the simultaneous performance can be executed a plurality of times (twice) per day. .

  For example, in this example, as the simultaneous demonstration display, the simultaneous demonstration display (1) starting at 8:40 and ending at 8:45 every day from Monday to Sunday, and 23:00 every day from Monday to Sunday A simultaneous demonstration display (2) starting at 30 minutes and ending at 23:35 is set. In this example, both the simultaneous demonstration display (1) and the simultaneous demonstration display (2) are set to be executed at a timing outside the game hall business hours (10:00 to 23:00). However, such a simultaneous demonstration display may be set to be executed at a timing within the business hours of the game hall.

  In this example, the simultaneous production (1) starts at 14:00 and ends at 14:05 every day from Monday to Sunday, and 20:00 every day from Monday to Sunday. And a simultaneous effect display (2) starting at 20:00 and ending at 20:05 is set. In this example, both the simultaneous production (1) and the simultaneous production (2) are set to be executed at the timing within the game hall business hours (10: 00-23: 00). Such a simultaneous effect may be set to be executed at a timing outside the business hours of the amusement hall.

  In the production control microcomputer 800, data and a program for creating a simultaneous operation information table are stored in the control ROM 84, and each operation in the simultaneous operation information table is performed based on an operation of the setting operation unit 355 by a store clerk in the game hall. A program for setting data is stored in the control ROM 84. For example, when the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, the data shown in FIG. An operation information table is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354. For example, data for setting the date and time for performing various simultaneous operations based on the operation start date and time is set as default value setting data, and the date and time for performing various simultaneous operations is set using the default value setting data Then, data as shown in (g) of FIG. 12 is set as the default value of the simultaneous operation information. Thereafter, the contents of the simultaneous operation information table can be arbitrarily changed based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355. When the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is registered, a simultaneous operation information table in which no data is set is automatically created and stored in the RAM 354, and thereafter, a setting operation unit 355 by a store clerk in the game hall. Based on the above operation, the contents of the simultaneous operation information table may be arbitrarily set (stored in the RAM 354). The contents of the simultaneous operation information table can be newly created based on the operation of the setting operation unit 355.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are special reach and special effect (mission effect) as effects that can be executed for a limited period. The special reach can be executed only on a predetermined day of the week, and the special effect can be executed only in a predetermined time zone. Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can make the player interested in the effect and can improve the player's interest by enabling the execution of a limited time period. In addition, as an effect limited to such a period, it is an effect closely related to the big hit compared to other effects (special reach is an effect that appears more easily than when it is out of place when it hits a big hit The special effects are effects that become a big hit when the mission is achieved, and these are effects closely related to the big hit), so that the player's interest can be further improved. Also, special effects can be executed at intervals of several hours every day in a week, and special reach can be executed at intervals determined at random during a period (one day) set once in a week. The interval at which execution is possible is set differently. Since the intervals at which such effects that attract the player's interest can be executed are different, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing at which these effects are executed, and the timing at which specific effects are executed is varied. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  The special reach can be executed when the special effect is being executed and when the special effect is not being executed. In order to improve the fun of the production, the special reach production mode is different between the special reach executed when the special production is executed and the special reach executed when the special production is not executed. To be controlled. For example, in the special reach production performed when the special production is not executed, the production in the production mode in which the flashing of the decorative design as described above blinks the design in yellow, while the special production is performed. In the special reach executed when it is being executed, an effect is produced in an effect mode in which the flashing of the decorative symbol as described above causes the symbol to flash in red. Thereby, since the aspect of special reach is diversified, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  Note that the setting and changing of the contents of the various information tables described above may be performed by changing the configuration of the selection button 358 to an operation unit capable of inputting various information in the same manner as the setting operation unit 355. The operation unit functions as an operation unit capable of inputting various information only when a predetermined operation such as inputting a predetermined personal identification number which the player cannot know is performed. When it is not possible to perform the input operation, it is configured to function as the selection button 358.

  Next, representative examples of the effect control command and the standard date / time command will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing representative examples of the effect control command and the standard date / time command in a table format. In FIG. 14A, for each of the representative effect control commands, MODE data and EXT data are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and the contents of instructions by the commands are shown. In FIG. 14B, for each of the representative effect control commands, the MODE data and the EXT data are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and the instruction content by the command is shown. In the figure, XXH indicates a hexadecimal number, and is a value that is arbitrarily set according to the command content by the effect control command.

  In FIG. 14A, commands 80XXH and 81XXH are variation pattern commands transmitted when the variation display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started. Variation patterns such as the reach variation pattern described above are used. Be notified. In the variation pattern command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern. Further, either “80H” or “81H” is designated as MODE data depending on whether the time reduction state or the storage fluctuation reduction state is set. “80H” is designated in the normal state that is not the time-short state or the memory fluctuation shortening state, and “81H” is designated in the time-short state or the memory fluctuation shortening state. Further, the kind of effect as described above is specified by the setting of EXT data.

  The command 8CXXH is a symbol information command, and it is specified by the setting of EXT data whether the display result is a probable big hit, a normal big hit, or an outage. In this way, by transmitting the symbol information command that can specify the type of jackpot, the effect control microcomputer 800 can distinguish whether the jackpot is a big hit or not, and when it is a big hit It is possible to clearly understand what kind of jackpot will be.

  The command 9F00H is an image that is displayed in the simultaneous demonstration display described above when the display condition such as when the variable display is not performed for a predetermined time after the reserved storage number becomes “0” is satisfied. Is a demonstration display command for instructing to execute a normal demonstration display as a predetermined normal demonstration display image for displaying different demonstration images. In the demonstration display command, the game control microcomputer 560 has a condition that at least one of the following is satisfied: a variable display is performed, or the number of reserved memories is not “0”. From the operating state, the variable display is not performed, and the number of reserved memories is “0” (there is no numerical data (held memory data) stored in the reserved memory buffer), that is, the reserved memory (The count value of the counter is “0”) Each time it is determined that the state has changed to the second state, it is transmitted only once. The production control microcomputer 800 determines that the display condition for the demonstration display is satisfied when the variation pattern is not received for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) after receiving the demonstration display command, and the variation display is performed. In the apparatus 9, a demonstration display is executed.

  The command A0XXH is a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state starts when the big hit such as the probability change big hit and the normal big hit, and the type of the big hit is designated by the setting of the EXT data. In this way, when a jackpot start command that can identify the type of jackpot is transmitted, the type of jackpot gaming state with which type of jackpot is started in the production control microcomputer 800 based on the command. Can be clearly understood.

  The command A3XXH is a big hit end command indicating that the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit such as the probability change big hit and the normal big hit, and the type of the big hit is indicated by the setting of the EXT data. In this way, when the jackpot end command that can identify the type of jackpot is transmitted, the effect control microcomputer 800 uses the command to determine what type of jackpot gaming state is to be ended. Since it is possible to clearly grasp, it is possible to grasp which state is a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy low-base state after the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the standard date and time command includes a standard second command, a standard minute command, a standard time command, a standard day command, a standard day command, a standard month command, a standard year command, and a transmission end command. .

  The command 20XXH is a standard second command indicating a standard second, and the number of seconds is specified by the setting of EXT data. The command 21XXH is a standard minute command indicating the standard minute, and the number of minutes is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 22XXH is a standard time command indicating standard time, and the time is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 23XXH is a standard day command indicating the standard day of the week, and the day of the week is designated by the setting of the EXT data. The command 24XXH is a standard date command indicating a standard date, and the number of days is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 25XXH is a standard month command indicating the standard month, and the month is specified by setting the EXT data. The command 26XXH is a standard year command indicating the standard year, and the year (Western calendar) is designated by setting the EXT data. Here, since the EXT data is 1-byte data, only numerical data in the range of “0 to 255” can be specified. In this embodiment, the numerical data is specified in the range of “0 to 255”. Therefore, the year in the range of “2000 to 2255” in the Christian era is shown. For example, when the EXT data is “0”, the data designates “2000”, and when the EXT data is “225”, the data designates “2225”. In the case of this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 800 performs processing for replacing such numerical data in the range of “0 to 255” with numerical data in the range of “2000 to 2255”. As the EXT data, by using 2-byte data, the year of the year such as 2000 may be directly designated by the numerical data. The command 2700H is a transmission end command for designating that the transmission is completed when the transmission of the standard date / time command is completed. As the EXT data, the last two digits of the year may be specified using 1-byte data.

  As described above, the standard date / time command is a command output from the standard date / time data output device 300, and includes a standard second command, standard minute command, standard time command, standard day command, standard day command, standard month command, and standard command. The commands are sequentially transmitted in the order of year commands, and a transmission end command is transmitted when transmission ends.

  The production control microcomputer 800 sequentially receives the standard date and time commands transmitted in this order, and based on the received commands, the second register 1021, the minute register 1022, and the hour register 1023 in the clock / calendar counter unit 1020. , The day register 1024, the day register 1025, the month register 1026, and the year register 1027 are newly set in order, and these count values are set to the standard year, month, day, day, hour. , Minutes, and seconds so that the current year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second can be counted correctly.

  Further, in the production control microcomputer 800, when the transmission end command is received, the variable display device 9 performs date / time setting completion notification for displaying a message indicating that the date / time setting is completed.

  Next, a display example of simultaneous demonstration display will be described. FIG. 15 is a front view of the gaming machine installation island 200 showing a display example of a simultaneous demonstration display. As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are arranged side by side on the gaming machine installation island 200.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the simultaneous demonstration display is the start time of the simultaneous demonstration display set in the simultaneous operation information table shown in FIG. 12 (g) in the fluctuation display device 9 of each pachinko gaming machine 1. The display of the image for simultaneous demonstration display is started, and when the end time of the simultaneous demonstration display set in the simultaneous operation information table is reached, the display of the image for simultaneous demonstration display is terminated. It is.

  Since the control for performing such simultaneous demonstration display is performed for each pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the time value of the RTCM 100 provided in each pachinko gaming machine 1, it is not started at the same time (when not executed synchronously). It can be determined that there is a deviation in the time value of the RTCM 100 between the pachinko gaming machines 1. Accordingly, for example, based on performing such simultaneous demonstration display outside the business hours of the game hall, whether or not there is a deviation in the time value of the RTCM 100 between the pachinko gaming machines 1 on each gaming machine installation island 200 If the standard date / time data output device 300 is used to reset the time value of the RTCM 100 of each pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the standard date / time data, It is possible to eliminate such a difference in timekeeping values.

  Thus, if the deviation of the time value of the RTCM 100 in each pachinko gaming machine 1 installed on each gaming machine installation island 200 can be eliminated, each gaming machine installation island 200 is within the business hours of the gaming hall as described above. Can be performed in synchronism in all the pachinko gaming machines 1 provided on each gaming machine installation island 200.

  Further, the simultaneous production performed on each gaming machine installation island 200 is the production performed simultaneously on the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed on each gaming machine installation island 200, as in the simultaneous demonstration display. In this example, the decoration lamp 25, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c of each pachinko gaming machine 1 are turned on with a predetermined light emission pattern. The light emission pattern in this simultaneous effect may be unique to the simultaneous effect, or may be used in common with the light emission pattern used when other effects are performed. In other words, any light emission pattern may be used as the light emission pattern in the simultaneous performance as long as it can be identified as the simultaneous performance.

  The simultaneous effect may be performed using a lamp other than the decoration lamp 25, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. The simultaneous effect may be a control for outputting a predetermined sound in addition to the control for operating the lamp. In addition, in addition to the control for operating the lamp, the simultaneous effect is a control for displaying a predetermined image on the variable display device 9 (for example, during the variable display being displayed on the variable display device 9 or not changing at that time) It is also possible to perform a control of superimposing and displaying a predetermined image for simultaneous production on the image being displayed. In addition, the simultaneous effect may be one in which only control for displaying a predetermined image on the variable display device 9 is performed. The simultaneous effect may be a control for outputting a predetermined sound in addition to a control for displaying a predetermined image on the variable display device 9. The simultaneous effect is a combination of control for operating a predetermined lamp, control for displaying a predetermined image on the variable display device 9, and control for outputting a predetermined sound. May be.

  By performing such simultaneous production on each gaming machine installation island 200 during the business hours of the game hall, the fun of the presentation performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved, and the interest of the player is improved. Can do.

  It should be noted that during the period in which the simultaneous performance is being executed, the control for increasing the appearance rate of the above-mentioned special reach, the control for increasing the appearance rate of the jackpot notice, and the type of the jackpot notice during the period other than that period Among the controls for changing the above, specific control such as executing any one or any combination may be performed.

  Next, an example of the effect display on the variable display device 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are display screen diagrams showing an example of effect display when a project and a project advance notice are executed on the variable display device 9. 16 and 17, as time elapses, a specific example of the effect display (a series of flows given the name “effect” in the figure) and events related to the effect display (“event” in the figure) A series of flows with the name “

  When 18:00 on June 1, 2006 is registered as the operation start date and time as shown in (a), project 1 is executed at 18:00 on June 22 as shown in (d). Until then, the effect type A1 is selected. The production type A1 includes, for example, a basic screen made up of a background image that makes an image of a spring mountain and a symbol formed only by numbers, as shown in (a). And, as shown in (a), the production type A1 is a production of a plurality of types of production contents a, b,... In which characters (for example, characters such as birds 701, balloons 702, etc.) that make the image of spring mountains appear. Includes images.

  Then, for example, according to the setting of the project notice information table of FIG. 12D, the project notice starts to be executed four days before the execution date of the project 1 as shown in FIG. For example, as the advance notice of the project, the change display device 9 displays a message for announcing the project such as “4 days until the project” as shown in (b) and “6 hours until the project” as shown in (c). The The date and time when such a project notice is executed is based on the execution date and time of each project in the project notice information table, and a predetermined period before (4 days, 3 days, 2 days, 1 day, 6 hours). The date and time is set to 3 hours before and 1 hour before. Such display of the project notice is preceded by either the condition that the next variable display is started or the condition that a predetermined period (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the project notice display. Is finished, and after that, a normal performance is performed.

  After that, as shown in (d), when it is 18:00 on June 22, which is the execution date and time of project 1, the effect type to be selected is the effect type A1 according to the setting of the project table in (c) of FIG. Is changed to production type B1. The production type B1 includes, for example, as shown in (d), a basic screen made up of a background image that makes the image of the spring sea, and a pattern formed of sea creatures and numbers. And, as shown in (d), the production type B1 is a production of a plurality of types of production contents a, b,... In which a character (for example, a character such as a seahorse 703 or a submersible 704) is displayed. Includes images.

  After that, although not shown in the drawing, as shown in (e), until 18:00 on July 13, which is the execution date and time of Project 2, is set according to the setting of the project notice information table in (d) of FIG. The execution of the project notice is started 4 days before the execution date of Project 2. Then, as shown in (e), when it is 18:00 on July 13, which is the execution date and time of project 2, based on the operation of the selection button 358 according to the setting of the project table in (c) of FIG. It is possible to select either the effect type A2 or the effect type B2, and for example, an effect type selection screen as shown in (e) is displayed.

  On the effect type selection screen, it is possible to select either the effect type A2 or the effect type B2 based on the operation of the selection button 358 by displaying the message “selection of effect”. Is shown. For example, as shown in (e), when the selection button 358 is operated when the basic screen of the effect type A2 that makes the image of summer mountains appear on the variable display device 9, the screen is switched, ( As shown in f), the basic screen of the production type B2 that gives an image of the summer sea is displayed. Also at this time, since the effect type can be further selected, the message “selectable effect” is displayed. Further, when the selection button 358 is operated while the basic screen of the production type B2 that images the summer sea is displayed, the screen is switched, and the production type A2 that images the summer mountain as shown in (g). The basic screen is displayed. Also at this time, since the effect type can be further selected, the message “selectable effect” is displayed. In this way, each time the selection button 358 is operated, the selected effect type is switched. On the effect type selection screen, the effect type indicated on the currently displayed screen indicates the effect type being selected. When the variable display of the decorative design is executed, the change display is executed using the effect type indicated on the currently displayed screen. Is done.

  Although illustration is omitted, the project is executed according to the setting of the project notice information table in FIG. 12D until 18:00 on August 3, which is the execution date of project 3 shown in FIG. The execution of the project notice is started 4 days before the execution date of 3. Then, at 18:00 on August 3, which is the execution date and time of the project 3, the production type A3 and the production type are performed based on the operation of the selection button 358 according to the setting of the project table in FIG. It becomes possible to select either B3 or effect type C1, and for example, an effect type selection screen similar to that shown in (e) is displayed.

  In the production type selection screen in that case, the message “Production selection is possible” is displayed, and based on the operation of the selection button 358, the production type A3, the production type B3, or the production type C1 is selected. It is shown that it has become possible. For example, when the selection button 358 is operated on the variable display device 9 when the basic screen of the production type A3 that makes an image of autumn mountains is displayed, the screen is switched and the production type B3 that makes an image of the autumn sea. The basic screen is displayed. Also at this time, since the effect type can be further selected, the message “selectable effect” is displayed. Then, when the selection button 358 is operated while the basic screen of the production type B3 is displayed, the screen is switched, and the basic screen of the production type C1 that makes the image of the spring town appear. Also at this time, since the effect type can be further selected, the message “selectable effect” is displayed. Furthermore, when the selection button 358 is operated while the basic screen of the production type C1 is displayed, the screen is switched, and the basic screen of the production type A3 is displayed again. Also at this time, since the effect type can be further selected, the message “selectable effect” is displayed.

  Thus, each time the selection button 358 is operated, the selected effect type is switched between the three effect types. In the production type selection screen in this case, the production type indicated by the screen being selected and displayed indicates the production type being selected, as in the case where the production type can be selected from the two production types. When the variable display is executed, the variable display is executed using the effect type indicated by the screen being displayed.

  When the project 3 is executed, the types of effects that can be selected using the selection button 358 are increased as compared with those before the project 3 is executed. Can improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 are display screen diagrams showing an example of effect display when notification is executed on the variable display device 9. In FIGS. 18 and 19, similar to FIGS. 16 and 17, specific examples of effect display and events related to effect display are shown.

  Here, an example of a notice effect display on Sunday will be described. In the variable display device 9, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a simultaneous demonstration as shown in FIG. 15 is performed according to the setting of the simultaneous demonstration display in the simultaneous operation information table of FIG. 12 (g). Display is performed. Then, after the simultaneous demonstration display is finished, a normal performance is performed. Thereafter, at 10:00, according to the setting of the notification information table in FIG. 12E, an effect of notifying information on the event of the day is performed as shown in FIG. Such notification effects are displayed on the condition that the next variable display as shown in (c) is started, and for a predetermined period after the display of notification effects as shown in (d) is started (for example, The process ends when any one of the conditions that 20 minutes) has passed first, and thereafter, a normal effect is performed as in (c) to (e). In addition, the notification information displayed in such an effect display of the notification is the information to be notified, such as a corner of the screen of the variable display device 9, until a certain period of time elapses after the end condition as described above is satisfied. Even when the variable display device 9 is performing variable display of decorative symbols, such as reducing the display to a predetermined position, it may be displayed continuously.

  Next, at 17:00, according to the setting of the notification information table in FIG. 12E, an effect of notifying information on the store manager's push pad is performed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the same conditions as in the cases (c) to (e), a normal effect is performed as in (g) to (i). Next, at 21:00, according to the setting of the notification information table of FIG. 12 (e), an effect of notifying recommended table information is performed as shown in (j). After that, based on the establishment of the same conditions as in the cases (c) to (e), a normal effect is performed as in (k) to (n).

  Although illustration is omitted here, a special effect will be given by specifying the time to be executed, such as “Mission will be performed today at 10:00 and 17:00” at 9:30 every day. A special performance notice is displayed to display a message indicating. By giving such a notice, the player can know what time the special performance will be performed on that day. In addition, as the special effect announcement, in addition to the effect that the special effect is performed, the type of the special effect to be executed may be notified.

  Also, although not shown here, a special reach notice that displays the message “Special Reach Appears on Monday” at 9:45 pm every day from Tuesday to Sunday, excluding Monday when special reach appears. Is done. By giving such a notice, the player can know that a special reach will appear on Monday. In addition, as a special reach notice, when the time zone in which the special reach is performed is limited, in addition to the fact that the special reach appears, the time zone that appears may be announced.

  FIG. 20 is a display screen diagram showing the flow of the effect display of the special effect and the normal effect in one day for each day of the week. In FIG. 20, similar to FIG. 16 and the like, a specific example of effect display and events related to the effect display are shown. In FIG. 20, the flow of production display from Monday to Friday is shown in (a1) to (a9), and the flow of production display on Saturday, Sunday and public holidays is shown in (b1) to (b9).

  From Monday to Friday, according to the setting of the special performance information table of FIG. 12 (f), when it becomes 10:00 and when 17:00, (a1), ( As in a8), a message indicating that the execution timing of the first special effect “Golden Time” has arrived is displayed on the variable display device 9, and “Reach out with 7 within 20 minutes”. An effect display at the start of the first special effect (hereinafter referred to as a first special effect start display) by displaying (presenting) the mission achievement condition is performed, and the period of the special effect (mission period) starts. . The message “Reach within 7 minutes within 20 minutes” implies that the mission will be a promising big hit. When the mission period is started, the player can determine that the mission period is the mission period, such as the color of the background image of the decorative pattern changes to a predetermined special color compared to the normal production period. An effect is made so that it can be easily identified. In addition, during the mission period, a display indicating the remaining time of the mission period as indicated by “3 minutes remaining” in (a2) is performed.

  In addition, on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays, in addition to the above-described first special effects being executed as shown in (b1) and (b8) in accordance with the setting of the special effect information table in (f) of FIG. The second special effect of “special golden time” in the variable display device 9 as shown in (b4) and (b6) at 12:00 and 15:00, respectively. A message indicating that the execution timing of has arrived is displayed, and the second special performance is started by displaying (presenting) the mission achievement condition such as “Stop 7 to the left within 20 minutes!” An effect display at the time (hereinafter referred to as a second special effect start display) is performed, and the mission period starts. In addition, during the mission period, a display indicating the remaining time of the mission period, such as “3 minutes remaining” in (b2), is performed.

  For each of the first special effect and the second special effect, the mission period as a period during which the special effect for performing the mission effect is executed is, for example, 20 minutes, and when the mission achievement condition is satisfied in the 20 minutes, It is indicated that the mission has been achieved (the mission achievement symbol is displayed in a predetermined variation display area), and when the mission achievement condition is not satisfied, it is indicated that the mission is not achieved. The mission period may be different between the first special effect and the second special effect.

  FIGS. 21 to 24 are display screen diagrams showing examples of effect display when the special effect is executed on the variable display device 9. FIG. 21 shows a case where it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined and the combination of the big hit symbol of 7 is determined as the variable display result within the period in which the first special effect for informing 7 as the mission achievement symbol is executed. explain.

  FIG. 21A is a display screen diagram in the variable display device 9 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. According to the setting of the simultaneous demonstration display in the simultaneous operation information table of FIG. 12G, the simultaneous demonstration display as shown in FIG. 15 is performed.

  FIG. 21 (b) is a display screen diagram showing a variation display result after the end of the simultaneous demonstration display and after the variation display. “722” is displayed as the fluctuation display result.

  FIG. 21C is a display screen diagram when the execution of the first special effect is started and the mission period is started. According to the setting of the special effect information table of (f) of FIG. 12, for example, when the time for executing the first special effect such as 10:00 is reached, the mission period is started. When the execution of the first special effect is started, a message such as “Give a reach at 7 within 20 minutes of the golden time!” Is displayed.

  FIG. 21D is a display screen diagram when the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times after the first special effect is started and the fluctuation display result is stopped. Here, the combination of the symbols “324” is stopped and displayed as the fluctuation display result. It should be noted that during the period in which the special effect is being executed, the mission achievement condition (“reach out with 7”) is displayed regardless of whether or not the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 21 (e) is a display screen diagram when the variable display is started in which it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined, and the combination of the seven big hit symbols is determined as the variable display result. FIG. 21F is a display screen diagram when 7 is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area and 7 is stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display area in the variation display process started in (e). FIG. 21 (g) is a display screen diagram informing that the mission has been completed by 7 being stopped and displayed in the right variation display area in (f). A message such as “Mission completed!” Indicating that the mission has been completed is displayed above the 7 reach state.

  FIG. 21H is a display screen diagram when the combination of 7 jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed as a variation display result. In the upper part where the combination of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a message such as “Big jackpot !!” indicating that a jackpot has occurred is displayed. Thus, in this embodiment, when a mission is achieved as shown in FIG. 21 (f), a combination of jackpot symbols including the mission achievement symbol is always stopped and displayed as a variable display result as shown in (h). The

  FIG. 21 (i) is a display screen diagram when the big hit gaming state due to the big hit generated in (h) ends. A message such as “End of jackpot” is displayed. FIG. 21 (j) is a display screen diagram when the first special effect started in FIG. 21 (c) is finished and a normal effect is started.

  FIG. 22 illustrates a case where the mission is not achieved because 20 minutes have passed without being a big hit within the period in which the first special effect informing 7 as the mission achievement symbol is being executed. 22 (a) to 22 (d) are the same as the contents described in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (d), and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  FIG.22 (e) is a display screen figure when 20 minutes have passed since the 1st special effect was started by (c). A message such as “20 minutes have passed” indicating that 20 minutes have passed since the first special effect was started is displayed. FIG. 22F is a display screen diagram informing that the mission has not been achieved. A message such as “Sorry!” Indicating that the mission has not been completed is displayed. FIG. 22 (g) is a display screen diagram when the first special effect started in FIG. 22 (c) is finished and a normal effect is started.

  FIG. 23 shows the case where it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined and the combination of 7 big hit symbols is determined as the variable display result within the period in which the first special effect for informing 2 as the mission achievement symbol is being executed. explain. 23 (a), (b), (k), and (m) are the same as the contents described in FIGS. 21 (a), (b), (i), and (j). Do not repeat the explanation.

  FIG.23 (c) is a display screen figure when execution of a 1st special effect is started and a mission period is started. In FIG. 23 (c), when the execution of the first special effect is started, a message such as “Give a reach at 2 within 20 minutes of the golden time!” Is displayed.

  FIG. 23D is a display screen diagram when the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times after the first special effect is started and the fluctuation display result is stopped. Here, the combination of the symbols “324” is stopped and displayed as the fluctuation display result.

  FIG. 23 (e) is a display screen diagram when the variable display is started in which it is determined to be a probable variation big hit and the combination of 7 big hit symbols is determined as the variable display result. FIG. 23F is a display screen diagram when a mission achievement symbol addition effect for adding a mission achievement symbol is performed. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to add a mission achievement symbol using the RX count value shown in FIG. When it is decided to add a mission achievement symbol, there is already a symbol used for a combination of a big hit symbol (here, a normal big hit) that includes the mission achievement symbol in the jackpot symbol combination and a different type (probable big hit here) , Added as a mission achievement symbol. As shown in FIG. 23F, a message such as “Mission added!” Is displayed with white characters, and a message “Reach out with 7!” Is displayed below the message. At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced manner in the lower right corner of the display area of the variable display device 9. After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (g), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the center of the display area, and a message such as “Reach out with 2 or 7” is displayed above it. In FIG. 23G, 7 is further stopped and displayed in the left variation display area.

  FIG. 23 (h) is a display screen diagram when 7 is stopped and displayed in the left fluctuation display area after 7 is stopped and displayed in the left fluctuation display area in the fluctuation display process started in (e). FIG. 23 (i) is a display screen diagram informing that the mission has been completed by 7 being stopped and displayed in the right variation display area in (h). A message such as “Mission completed!” Indicating that the mission has been completed is displayed above the 7 reach state.

  FIG. 23J is a display screen diagram when the combination of 7 jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed as a variation display result. In the upper part where the combination of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a message such as “Big jackpot !!” indicating that a jackpot has occurred is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, there may be an effect of adding the mission achievement symbol shown in FIG. Further, when the mission achievement symbol added as described above is displayed and the mission is accomplished as shown in FIG. 23 (h), the combination of jackpot symbols including the mission achievement symbol which is always achieved as shown in (j). Is stopped and displayed as a fluctuation display result.

  FIG. 24 shows a case where it is determined that a normal jackpot is determined and a combination of four jackpot symbols is determined as a variable display result within a period in which the first special effect for informing 2 as a mission achievement symbol is being executed. explain. 24 (a) to (e), (h), and (i) are the same as those described in FIGS. 23 (a) to (e), (k), and (m). Do not repeat the explanation.

  FIG. 24 (h) is a display screen diagram when 4 is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area and 4 is stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display area in the variation display process started in (e). At the stage where 4 is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area, the mission unachieved is confirmed in the present variation display.

  FIG. 24G is a display screen diagram when the combination of 4 big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the variation display started in FIG. In the lower part where the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped, a message such as “Big hit!” Indicating that the big hit has occurred is displayed. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation display result of the variation display may be a combination of jackpot symbols even though the mission unachieved is determined as described with reference to FIG. For this reason, even if it is a case where mission unfulfillment is confirmed, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for being controlled by jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the first big hit reach of FIG. 9C is determined, and the types of effects corresponding to the reach are based on the first special big hit reach and the second special big hit reach shown in FIG. When the variable display is performed, the combination of 4 big hit symbols in FIG. 24 (g) is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display is started again with the big hit symbol combination being configured. A promotion effect is provided to inform whether or not it is completed. When the combination of probability variation jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed by the promotion effect, the promotion is successful, and after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the probability variation state is controlled. On the other hand, when the combination of the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed due to the promotion effect, the promotion fails, and the normal state is controlled without being controlled to the certainty state after the jackpot gaming state.

  As described above, the case where the first special effect is executed has been described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. However, when the second special effect is executed, the mission achievement symbol is displayed in a left-variable display during the 20-minute mission period. The fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by being stopped and displayed in the area, and then a combination of jackpot symbols including the mission achievement symbol is derived and displayed as a display result.

  In the example of the mission effect shown in FIG. 21, when the mission is achieved in the first special effect, the reach symbol displayed as the mission achievement condition is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the mission is achieved, in addition to displaying the reach symbol displayed as the mission achievement condition, before the big hit gaming state starts (for example, when the reach state is established, the big hit symbol When the combination is displayed in a stopped state, a message indicating that the mission “Mission accomplished!” Has been achieved may be displayed, for example, to notify that the mission has been accomplished. Similarly, when the mission is achieved in the second special performance, in addition to stopping the mission achievement symbol presented as the mission achievement condition in the left variation display area, before the jackpot gaming state starts (for example, When the mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed in the left fluctuation display area, when the combination of jackpot symbol is stopped), a message indicating that the mission “Mission accomplished!” Has been achieved is displayed. You may make it alert | report that it was achieved.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. 25 and 26 show main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, The main processing after S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 is started. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first sets the interruption prohibited (S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (S3). In S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set the mode to indicate the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (S4). By the process of S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and the PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state according to the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (S5). When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as a + 5V power source gradually reaches a specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of S5 (that is, By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is on, the game control microcomputer 560 turns off the power-off signal again after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (S80). Check if it exists. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (S6).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to a clear signal check process indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM 55 has been operated, and based on the clear signal, the above-mentioned clear switch It is confirmed whether or not is turned on (S7).

  Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once, but may confirm the state of the clear signal multiple times. For example, if it is confirmed that the clear signal is off, a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and then the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after a predetermined delay time. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  Further, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch has been operated to the on state before the processing of S5, and when it is confirmed that the clear switch has been operated to the on state, the clear switch on flag is set. Thereafter, in S7, it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch on flag is set. If the clear switch on flag is set, the process proceeds to S8. If the clear switch on flag is not set, the process proceeds to S10. You may make it. In this way, the clear switch on flag indicates that the clear switch is turned on at an early stage after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. There is no need to keep the clear switch on (continue to the on state) and make the gaming control microcomputer 560 check the on state of the clear switch. In the configuration in which the storage data in the RAM of the payout control board 37 is also backed up by the backup power supply, the clear switch is turned on when the clear signal is also input to the payout control board 37 after the power is turned on. Although the check timing of the clear switch is almost the same between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37, the initial data at the time of power-on is between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37. It is possible to prevent a shift in recognition regarding the conversion.

  When it is determined that the clear switch is operated in the ON state, the initialization process in S10 to S14 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the clear switch is not operated in the ON state, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the data protection process of the backup RAM area (for example, the process of stopping the power supply such as the addition of parity data) ) Is confirmed (S8). When power supply stops, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, it is determined that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has not been performed, the initialization process of S10 to S14 is executed.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined based on the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process depending on the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is merely an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the game control microcomputer 560 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (S9). Clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 560 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process of S10 to S14 that is executed when the power is turned on but not when the power supply is stopped is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the game state to return the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Perform processing. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S92). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (such as a special symbol process flag), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (S93), and proceeds to S15.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, etc. Accordingly, an initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  The game control microcomputer 560 sets the initial address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (S13), and issues an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents. Processing to transmit to the sub-board is executed (S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used. Here, the sub-board means a board (for example, an effect control board 80 or the like) on which a circuit that performs control in response to a control signal such as a command from the main board 31 is formed.

  As described above, the game store clerk and the like can easily perform the initial operation by starting the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, turning on the power switch) while the clear switch is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuits described above (S15). Specifically, as described above, the numerical data obtained by performing a predetermined calculation using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit. In this case, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program so as to cause each random number circuit to update the value of R1. Further, the setting of various functions such as the numerical data update range selection setting function, the numerical data update rule selection setting function, and the numerical data update rule selection switching function by the user described above is performed by S15. Done.

  The game control microcomputer 560 sets a timer interrupt setting for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 msec). Processing is executed (S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 msec is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 msec.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S18). The game control microcomputer 560 disables the interrupt when the display random number update process is executed (S17), and enters the interrupt enable state when the display random number update process ends (S19). Note that the display random number is a predetermined random number (R3 to R5) used for controlling the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and the display random number update process is a counter for generating display random numbers. This is a process for updating the count value. Specifically, in the display random number update process, the values of R3 to R5 described above are updated. In the present embodiment, the display random number update process in S18 is repeatedly performed during the interrupt waiting process surplus time after the interrupt process is executed every 2 msec until the next interrupt process is executed. Become.

  Note that when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed because the display random number update process is also executed in the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid doing so. That is, if the timer interrupt is generated during the processing of S18 and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, the continuity of the count value is impaired. There is. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the process of S18.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs during the execution of the main process, specifically, in the period when the interrupt is permitted during the execution of the loop process of S17 to S19 in FIG. 26, the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. This timer interruption process is executed once every 2 msec, for example.

  In the timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 560 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) ( S101). Subsequently, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the V winning switch 22, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, State determination is performed (switch processing: S102). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one. Each switch timer is used to determine that each switch has been normally turned on when the value of each timer has exceeded a predetermined value, that is, when each switch has been turned on continuously for a predetermined time. Used.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the initial value is updated when the count value is updated to the predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process of S15, and the random number circuit A process of updating the initial value to be input is performed (initial value update process: S103). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number used for the game control (random number update process: S104). Specifically, in the random number update process in S104, the values of R2 to R6 described above are updated.

  When the initial value update process and the random number update process are performed, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a count value permutation process for changing the permutation of count values in the random number circuit (S105). In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the count value permutation change process is determined depending on whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set in the random number circuit setting process. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a count value permutation change process based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a special symbol process (S106). In the special symbol process control, a corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. . The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Also, normal symbol process processing is performed (S107). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs processing for setting various effect control commands including commands related to the decorative symbols synchronized with the change of the special symbols in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 and transmitting the effect control commands (decorative symbol commands). Control processing: S108). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variation display period) is the same.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (S109).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, etc. (S110). Specifically, a payout command signal such as a prize ball number signal indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on turning on the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and the like. . A payout control microcomputer (not shown) mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number signal indicating the number of prize balls.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the increase / decrease of the reserved memory number, and when the start memory is received and the reserved memory number increases, or when the variable display is started and the reserved memory number decreases, When the number of reserved memories changes, a storage process for transmitting a reserved memory number command that can specify the number of reserved memories is executed (S111). In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be confirmed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, is executed (S112). Further, a solenoid output process (S113) is executed for instructing the output circuit 59 to drive various solenoids when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In order to switch the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 20 to the open state or the closed state, or to switch the game ball passage in the big winning opening, the output circuit 59 is connected to the solenoids 16, 21, 21A is driven.

  Next, a special symbol display control process is performed (S114). In the special symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the special symbol display 8 is performed. Further, a normal symbol display control process is performed (S115). In the normal symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 is performed. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S116).

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting. Further, the processing of S102 to S115 (excluding S109 and S112) corresponds to game control processing for controlling the progress of the game.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process of counting the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed. Each time the game control microcomputer 560 executes the timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 560 counts up an interrupt number counter indicating the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed. For example, when the solenoid control process is completed in S113, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the value of the interrupt counter indicating the number of times that the timer interrupt process has been executed. This interrupt counter is used, for example, to determine whether or not a condition for reading a random number value from a random number circuit is satisfied.

  Also, for example, in the timer interrupt process, the switch process (S102), the decorative symbol command control process (S108), and the interrupt count process (counting the number of times the timer interrupt process described above is executed) are included in the game control process. Only the process) may be executed, and other processes in the game control process may be executed in the main process. In this case, in the loop process from S17 to S19 in the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processes of S103 to S107 and S110 to S116 (except S112) among the game control processes (described above). Does not include interrupt count processing.

  In addition, after counting the number of interrupts as described above in the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 confirms that the timer interrupt number has reached a predetermined number (for example, three times) with the start port switch 14a turned on. If detected, it is determined that a condition for reading a random number value from the random number circuit is satisfied, and a random number reading flag indicating that the condition for reading the random number value is satisfied is set. In the main process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the random number read flag is set when executing a later-described start port switch passing process (S122) in the special symbol process (S106), and the random number read flag is set. If it is determined that the start port switch 14a is on, an output control signal is output to the random number circuit, and the updated value of R1 is read. Then, in the main process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not to make a big hit based on the read random number value when executing a special symbol normal process (S130) described later in the special symbol process (S106). Become. This is performed so that the same random number value is not continuously read.

  Next, the special symbol process (S106) in the main process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 has a start opening switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won a start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 in a state where the random number read flag is set. If it is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 has occurred (S121), after the start opening switch passing process (S122) is performed, depending on the internal state, S130 to S137 Do one of these processes.

In the start port switch passing process of S122, the numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 when the start port switch 14a is turned on (specifically, when the aforementioned random number read flag is set) is stored. Check whether the number (pending storage number) has reached the upper limit (4), and if the number of numerical data stored in the holding storage buffer has not reached the upper limit, the above-described random number read flag is set Whether or not it is set, the count value of the reserved storage counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by one. Then, the R1 numerical data from the random number circuit, and the random counters R2 to R2 for determining the big hit type / hit symbol are respectively extracted and correspond to the extraction order of the reserved storage buffer (corresponding to the value of the reserved memory counter). The process of storing in the storage area is executed. Here, the extraction of R1 numerical data from the random number circuit is performed by inputting an output control signal to the random number circuit and reading out the numerical data of R1 stored as the random number value updated by the random number circuit. Thus, when the start port switch 14a is turned on and the stored number (holding storage number) of the numerical data (holding storage data) stored in the holding storage buffer does not reach the upper limit value, the numerical data is extracted. The condition is satisfied and the condition for executing the variable display, that is, the variable display execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied.
The determination as to whether or not the start port switch 14a is normally turned on is provided with a timer corresponding to the start port switch 14a for measuring the time during which the start port switch 14a is continuously turned on, When the timer value reaches a predetermined value, it may be determined that the start port switch 14a is in an on state.

  Special symbol normal processing (S130): State in which execution of variation display of special symbols can be started (for example, the variation display of symbols is not performed on the special symbol display 8, and the variation display of the previous symbol on the special symbol display 8 is displayed. It waits for a predetermined period to elapse from the end and a state where the game is not a big hit game. Then, when the variable symbol display can be started, the variable display start condition is satisfied, and the reserved memory count is confirmed by confirming the count value of the reserved memory counter for the special symbol. If the count value of the holding storage counter is not 0, the jackpot determination as to whether or not the jackpot is determined as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol display 8 is performed based on the extracted value of R1 for jackpot determination. (The count value of the pending storage counter is decremented by 1). If it is determined that the game is a big hit, the big win flag is set, and the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to the special symbol stop symbol setting process of S131. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not set (when it is determined that the jackpot is lost), the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the special symbol stop symbol setting process of S131 without setting the jackpot flag. . When the execution condition (start condition) of the above-described variation display is satisfied, but the count value of the hold storage counter is 0, the above-described demonstration display command is set. The demonstration display command set here is output to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. As described above, such a demonstration display command is at least one of the fact that the game control microcomputer 560 is performing a variable display or that the number of reserved memories is not “0”. Once every time it is determined that the change has been made from the first operation state where the condition is satisfied to the second state in which no change display is performed and the number of reserved memories is “0”. Only sent.

  As described above, when the demonstration control command output in this way is received, the effect control microcomputer 800 counts the time during which the variable display is not continuously performed, and the time is a predetermined time. When the time reaches (for example, 60 seconds), the above-described normal demonstration display is executed in the variable display device 9.

  Special symbol stop symbol setting processing (S131): When a big hit is made, the jackpot symbol is determined while determining the jackpot type by determining the type of jackpot based on the R2 extraction value for determining the jackpot type / hit symbol described above. To do. The probability variation determination determines whether or not to control the probability variation state after the big hit. Further, when it comes off, the R3 value for determining the above-mentioned loss symbol is extracted, and the loss symbol is determined based on the extracted value. Then, a symbol information command is set for designating special symbol information to be derived and displayed (information such as information indicating which symbol is likely to be a big hit, normal big hit, or off). The symbol information command set here is output to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the variation pattern setting process of S132.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S132): Based on predetermined determination results such as jackpot determination and reach determination, the variation pattern data table is selected, and the value of the random counter R4 for determining the variation pattern is extracted to obtain the value of R4. Accordingly, by selecting and determining a variation pattern to be executed from among a plurality of types of variation patterns set in the variation pattern data table, the variation pattern for variation display on the special symbol display 8 and the variation display device 9 is selected and determined. To do. Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern data table, the table at the time of failure shown in FIG. 9 (a) selected when there is a shift without reaching reach and the table at the time of shift reach shown in FIG. 9 (b). And a big hit table shown in FIG. 9C, which is selected when a big hit is made. In addition, as such a variation pattern data table, a data table for a short time when a shortened variation display time is selected, and a data table for a non-short time when a normal variation display time that is not shortened is selected. It is provided separately. When the time-saving flag is set, or when the number of special symbols reserved is greater than or equal to a predetermined number in the non-time-saving state where the time-saving flag is not set, When the data table is selected and the state is not in such a state, the non-short-time data table for which the normal variable display time that is not shortened is selected is selected.

  Also, after setting the change display time (the time from the start of change until the display result derivation display) for the change display on the special symbol display 8 on the basis of the selected change pattern, the special symbol process timer is set. Start the special symbol process timer. In addition, a drive signal for starting the special symbol variation display is set. The drive signal set here is output in S114 of FIG. In addition, a variation pattern command which is a command for commanding a variation pattern including information on the length of the variation display time of the decorative design is set. The variation pattern command set here is output to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the special symbol variation process of S133.

  In the variation pattern setting process, when the big hit is controlled, one variation pattern is selected and determined from the big hit reach variation patterns including the first and second special big hit reach that performs the promotion effect, so that the promotion effect is performed. Whether or not will be decided.

  Special symbol variation processing (S133): When the variation display time in the variation pattern selected and determined in the variation pattern setting processing has elapsed (the special symbol process timer set in S132 times out), the special symbol process flag is shifted to S134. Update as follows.

  Special symbol stop process (S134): Control is performed so that symbols that are variably displayed on each of the special symbol indicator 8 and the variable display device 9 are stopped. Specifically, a drive signal for stopping the special symbol is set. The drive signal set here is output in S114 of FIG. Then, a symbol stop command for stopping the decorative symbol is set. The symbol stop command set here is output to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. If the big hit flag is set, the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the pre-opening process for the big winning opening in S135. Otherwise, the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the special symbol normal process of S130.

  Pre-winner opening process (S135): In the pre-opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 performs control to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer. The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. As a result, in the pre-opening process for the big winning opening in the first round, a process for transmitting the above-mentioned jackpot start command to the effect control board 80 is performed. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the large winning opening opening process of S136.

  Processing for opening a big prize opening (S136): Control for transmitting a round start command for displaying a round in the big hit gaming state to the production control microcomputer 800, and conditions for closing the big prize opening in each round, That is, a process for confirming that the end condition of each round is satisfied is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to the pre-opening process for the big winning opening in S135. Thereby, it progresses to the pre-opening process of the big winning opening in the next round. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and there is no remaining round, the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the big hit end processing of S137. Thereby, it progresses to the jackpot end process.

  Big hit end processing (S137): As display control when the big hit gaming state is ended, control for transmitting the aforementioned big hit end command to the effect control microcomputer 800 in order to display an ending display indicating that the big hit gaming state is ended. To do. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S130. Further, when it is determined that the probability variation state is set by the special symbol stop symbol setting process, the processing for setting the probability variation flag as described above is performed. When the probability variation flag is set in this way, the probability variation state is entered after the big hit gaming state is completed. Further, when it is determined that the time reduction state is set by the special symbol stop symbol setting process, the process of setting the time reduction flag as described above is performed. When the time reduction flag is set in this manner, the time reduction state is established after the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S130.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 800 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 800.

  In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of a timer for determining the activation control activation interval, and the like (S201). When the initialization process is completed, the production control microcomputer 800 monitors the timer interrupt flag (S202). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 800 sets “1” as the value of the timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If “1” is set as the value of the timer interrupt flag in S202, the effect control microcomputer 800 clears the value of the timer interrupt flag (S203), and executes the following effect control process.

  A timer interrupt occurs every 33 msec, for example. That is, the effect control process is activated every 33 msec, for example. Further, in the timer interrupt process in this embodiment, only the process of setting “1” as the value of the timer interrupt flag is performed, and the specific effect control process is executed in the main process, but the timer interrupt process The effect control process may be executed.

  In the effect control process, first, a power-off process for monitoring whether or not a power-off signal is output is executed (S204). Next, when a command such as an effect control command and a standard date / time command is received, a command analysis process for analyzing what the received command is is executed (S205). In the command analysis process, a command reception flag for specifying what command is received for the received command is set. For example, when a variation pattern command as described above is received as an effect control command, a command reception flag indicating the variation pattern command and the type of variation pattern is set. Also, for example, when a standard date / time command is received, it is a standard date / time command, and the type of standard date / time command (standard second command, standard minute command, standard time command, standard day command, standard day command, standard month command, And a command reception flag indicating a standard year command). In the command analysis process, when a standard date / time command is received, corresponding to the received standard date / time command, year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute or the time indicated by the EXT data of the standard date / time command is received. Numerical data of seconds is stored as reception standard value data in the RAM 85, and is used for setting a time value of the RTCM 100. The received standard value data is rewritten every time a standard date / time command is received.

  Next, specific information that is a process for managing specific information such as information related to project execution, information related to project notice, information related to notification, information related to special effects, information related to state selection switching, and information related to simultaneous operation Management processing is executed (S206). The contents of the specific information management process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a simultaneous effect process, which is a process for executing the aforementioned simultaneous effect, is executed (S207). The contents of the simultaneous effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, effect control process processing is performed (S208). The contents of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (the state indicated by the effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the variable display device 9 and the light emission control of various lamps are performed. And the effect control including the control of the sound by the speaker 27 is executed.

  Next, when the above-mentioned standard date / time command is received, the count values of the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second in the clock / calendar counter unit 1020 in the RTCM 100 are converted into the standard year based on the command. , Month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second, the RTCM management process for managing the count value in the RTCM 100 is performed (S209).

  Next, a random number update process for updating a predetermined random counter is executed (S210). In the random number updating process, for example, various random counters such as a random counter RU-1 to RU-3 for determining a decorative symbol stop symbol and a random counter RV for determining an effect content are updated. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in S202.

  The effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is input to the interrupt terminal of the effect control microcomputer 800. For example, when an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, an INT interrupt is generated in the effect control microcomputer 800. Then, when the INT interrupt is generated, the effect control microcomputer 800 executes a process of receiving the effect control command in the INT interrupt process. In the process of receiving the effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 800 stores the received effect control command data in a command reception buffer provided in the RAM 85. Similarly, when the connector is removed and replaced as described above, the standard date / time INT signal from the standard date / time data output device 300 is also connected to an interrupt terminal to which the effect control INT signal is input in the effect control microcomputer 800. Input to the same interrupt terminal. For example, when the standard date / time INT signal from the standard date / time data output device 300 is turned on, an INT interrupt is generated in the production control microcomputer 800. Then, when the INT interrupt is generated, the production control microcomputer 800 executes a process of receiving the standard date / time command in the INT interrupt process. In the process of receiving the standard date / time command, the production control microcomputer 800 stores the received standard date / time command data in a command reception buffer provided in the RAM 85.

  Each of the effect control command from the main board 31 and the standard date / time command from the standard date / time data output device 300 is an effect control microcomputer by the INT interrupt process of FIG. 30 which is an interrupt process different from the effect control main process. 800 is received.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control command and the standard date / time command received by the effect control microcomputer 800 are stored in a command reception buffer, which is a storage area for storing the received command provided in the RAM 85. The command reception buffer is a ring buffer type buffer capable of storing six 2-byte commands. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. Each of the reception command buffers 1 to 12 is a buffer used corresponding to each of the values of the command reception number counter being 0 to 11. Note that the command reception buffer does not necessarily have to be a ring buffer format. For example, three command designation command storage areas (2 × 3 = 6 byte command reception buffer), and other command storage such as variation pattern designation are stored. A buffer configuration such as one area (2 × 1 = 2-byte command reception buffer) may be used.

  Each time the production control microcomputer 800 receives a command (production control command and standard date / time command), the reception number counter is incremented from zero. When the command reception number counter is 0, the reception command buffer 1 is selected and the reception command is stored.

  When the command reception number counter is 2, the reception command buffer 3 is selected and the reception command is stored. Further, when the command reception number counter is 10, the reception command buffer 11 is selected and the reception command is stored. Further, when the command reception number counter is 11, the reception command buffer 12 is selected and the reception command is stored. Depending on the number of commands transmitted in this way, the effect control microcomputer 800 stores different buffer storage areas as storage areas for receiving received commands. This received command buffer can store received commands up to 12 times at the same time, and when a new command is received with commands stored in all storage areas from the received command buffer 1 to the received command buffer 12 In this case, since the command reception number counter is counted up again from 0, new commands are sequentially overwritten from the reception command buffer 1 which is a storage area storing the oldest command to the reception command buffer 12 in order. It is a ring buffer that repeats.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an INT interrupt process executed by the effect control microcomputer 800. The INT interrupt process is a process executed as an interrupt process every time an INT signal (effect control INT signal or standard date / time INT signal) is received.

  First, processing for reading the transmitted command (effect control command or standard date / time command) is performed (S801). Next, it is determined whether or not the read command is the first byte (S802). For example, a command form that can identify whether it is the first byte or the second byte, such as making the value of the specific bit different between the first byte and the second byte of the command, and based on the value of the specific bit, It is desirable to determine whether it is the first byte or the second byte. In S802, if the read command is the first byte command, the process proceeds to S808, the received data is stored in the reception command buffer indicated by the command reception number counter, and the process proceeds to S809 described later.

  In step S802, it is determined whether the first byte has already been received if the read command is not the first byte command (S803). In S803, if the first byte data has not been received yet, the process proceeds to S809 described later. On the other hand, if the command of the first byte has already been received in S803, the process proceeds to S804, and the received command is stored in the storage area indicated by “the value of the command reception number counter + 1”, that is, the reception command buffer 2. Then, the value of the command reception number counter is “+2”. As a result, in the area where the next received command is stored, the first byte becomes the reception command buffer 3 and the second byte becomes the reception command buffer 4. Thereafter, in the next INT interrupt processing, the value of the command reception number counter is incremented by +2, and the storage area in which the first byte is stored becomes the reception command buffers 5, 7, 9, 11 sequentially. The storage areas for storing the second byte are sequentially received command buffers 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the command reception number counter is 12 or more (S806). In S806, if the command reception number counter is not 12 or more, the process proceeds to S809 described later. On the other hand, if the command reception number counter is 12 or more in S806, the command reception number counter is cleared (S807), and the process proceeds to S809 described later. As a result, the command can be stored in the reception buffer until the two-byte data constituting one command is received six times. Will be overwritten and memorized. Next, in S809, the interrupt is permitted and the INT interrupt process is terminated. Through the processing as described above, the production control command or standard date / time command data composed of 2 bytes is received by the production control microcomputer 800.

  Next, the command analysis processing in S205 of FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.

  In the command analysis process, it is determined whether or not there is received command data stored in the command reception buffer as described above (S211), and if there is no received command, the process returns. On the other hand, when there is a reception command, the reception command is read (S212). The command data read here is erased in the command reception buffer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read reception command is the symbol information command described above (S213).

  When it is determined that it is a symbol information command, the symbol information command received, which is a reception flag that can identify the type of symbol information command received (probable big hit, normal big hit, or off type) corresponding to the received symbol information command A flag is set (S214). Then, the process returns to S211. If it is determined that it is not a symbol information command, it is determined whether or not the read received command is a variation pattern command (S215).

  When it is determined that the command is a fluctuation pattern command, the type of the received fluctuation pattern command is specified corresponding to the received command (a fluctuation pattern that does not become a reach, a fluctuation pattern of the first to third reach, etc.). A variation pattern reception flag, which is a possible reception flag, is set (S216), and the process returns to S211. If it is determined that the command is not a variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not the read received command is a jackpot start command (S217).

  When it is determined that it is a big hit start command, the big hit start command reception flag that is a reception flag that can specify the type of the received big hit start command (probability big hit or normal big hit start type) corresponding to the received command Is set (S218), and the process returns to S211. If it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot start command, it is determined whether or not the read received command is a jackpot end command (S219).

  When it is determined that the command is a jackpot end command, a jackpot end command reception flag, which is a reception flag that can identify the type of the received jackpot end command (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot end type) corresponding to the received command Is set (S220), and the process returns to S211. If it is determined that the command is not a big hit end command, it is determined whether or not the read received command is a standard date / time command (S221).

  When it is determined that the command is a standard date / time command, the type of received standard date / time command (standard second command, standard minute command, standard time command, standard day command, standard day command, standard day command, based on the first byte data of the received standard date / time command. A standard date / time command reception flag, which is a reception flag that can specify a day command, a standard month command, a standard year command, and a transmission end command, is set (S222). Then, based on the second byte data of the received standard date / time command, the standard value data indicated by the received standard date / time command is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 85 as received standard value data (S223). Return.

  If the received command is any other received command other than the aforementioned commands, it is determined what the received command is, a command reception flag corresponding to the received command is set (S224), and the process returns to S211. That is, S224 collectively shows processing corresponding to reception of various commands other than the above-described symbol information command, variation pattern command, jackpot start command, jackpot end command, and standard date / time command.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the specific information management processing in S206 of FIG. In the specific information management process, the following process is performed. First, by the setting operation unit 355, effect selection information by operation period shown in FIG. 12A, state selection information shown in FIG. 12B, project execution information shown in FIG. 12C, and FIG. 12 (d), notice information shown in FIG. 12 (e), special performance information shown in FIG. 12 (f), and specific information such as simultaneous operation information shown in FIG. 12 (g). It is determined whether or not a management information update operation has been performed (S311). Specifically, as described above, the setting operation unit 355 is specific information such as production period-specific production selection information, state selection information, project execution information, project notice information, notification information, special production information, and simultaneous operation information. It is an operation section (operation section having at least a function for designating information and a function for inputting numerical data) that can be operated by specifying and setting management information (including new settings and update settings) The store clerk can specify the management information to be set and perform the setting operation to input the setting data.

  If it is determined in S311 that the management information setting operation has been performed, the corresponding management information stored in the RAM 354 is newly set or updated according to the setting operation (S312), and the process proceeds to S313 to be described later. In S312, when there is an operation for setting management information, the management information before setting is read from the RAM 354 and displayed on the variable display device 9, and the management information after setting is written to the RAM 354 and displayed on the variable display device 9. To do. As described above, by operating the setting operation unit 355 with respect to specific information such as operation period-specific production selection information, state selection information, project execution information, project notice information, notification information, special production information, and simultaneous operation information. The management information stored in the RAM 354 can be newly set or updated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S311 that there is no management information setting operation, the process proceeds to S313 as it is.

  In S313, information (hereinafter referred to as date / time information) of the current time value (year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second) that the RTCM 100 measures is acquired from the RTCM 100. Then, acquisition of the project execution information shown in FIG. 12C (S314), acquisition of the project notice information shown in FIG. 12D (S315), and notification information shown in FIG. Acquisition (S316), acquisition of special effect information shown in (f) of FIG. 12 (S317), acquisition of state selection information shown in (b) of FIG. 12 (S318), and simultaneous processing shown in (g) of FIG. The operation information is acquired (S319).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been set (registered (stored) as the operation start date and time in the operation start date storage area of the RAM 354) (S320). In S320, it is determined whether or not the operation start date and time has been set based on whether or not the operation start date and time set flag has been set. The operation start date / time set flag is a flag that is set in S368 of FIG. 33 described later when the operation start date / time is registered.

  When it is determined that the operation start date / time has not been set, an operation start date / time setting process that is a process for setting the operation start date / time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed (S321), and the process proceeds to S322, which will be described later. The contents of the operation start date and time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation start date and time has been set, the process proceeds to S322 as it is.

  In S322, based on the date and time information acquired in S313 and the project notice information obtained in S315, whether or not the current date and time matches any project notice setting time registered in the project notice information table. Judging. When it is determined that it does not coincide with the set time of the project notice, the process proceeds to S323 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it coincides with the set time of the project notice, it is determined whether or not the project notice has been set to be executed (S323). Here, the meaning that the project notice has been set to execute means that various data settings for executing the project notice have been set. Specifically, in S323, whether or not the project notice has been set to run based on whether or not the project notice execution set flag indicating that the project notice matching the set time has been set has been set. Determine whether.

  If it is determined that the project notice has already been set, the process proceeds to S326 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the project notice is not already set, data for executing the project notice is set (S324). Specifically, in S324, for example, data such as image data for displaying a project notice as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C is set. Then, in response to the setting of the data for executing the project notice in S324, the execution notice completion flag for the project notice is set (S325), and the process proceeds to S326. Thus, based on the data set in S324, the project notice is executed in S417 of FIG. 37 described later.

  In S326, based on the date and time information acquired in S313 and the project execution information acquired in S314, whether or not the current date and time matches the set time of any project registered in the project execution information table. to decide. When it is determined that it does not coincide with the project setting time, the process proceeds to S331 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time coincides with the set time of the project, it is determined whether or not the project has been set for execution (S327). Here, the meaning that the project has been set for execution means that various data settings for executing the project have been made. Specifically, in S327, it is determined whether or not the project has been set for execution based on whether or not a project execution set flag indicating that the project that matches the set time has been set for execution has been set. To do.

  When it is determined that the project has been set to execute, the process proceeds to S331 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the project has not been set for execution, the effect information such as the operation period-specific effect selection information shown in FIG. 12A is acquired from the RAM 354 (S328). Then, data for executing the project is set (S329). Specifically, in S329, by setting the data for realizing the situation indicated by the project information, such as changing the effect type, by changing the above-described effect type selection data according to the project, FIG. As shown in (d), the effect type used for display on the variable display device 9 can be changed. Here, for setting the data for realizing the situation indicated by the project information, for example, changing the effect type indicated by the aforementioned effect type selection data stored in the RAM 354, or selecting according to the variation pattern command Setting data for changing the selection target of the production of the variation pattern and setting data for permitting selection of the production type by the selection button 358 are included. Then, in response to the fact that the data for executing the project is set in S329, the execution set flag of the project is set (S330), and the process proceeds to S331. Thus, when the project is executed in S414 of FIG. 37 described later, the project is executed based on the data set in S329 as described above.

  In S331, based on the date / time information acquired in S313 and the notification information acquired in S316, the current date / day of the week matches the set time (day of the week and time) of any notification registered in the notification information table. Determine whether or not. Specifically, in S331, after determining the day of the week based on the date and time information, the notification information table of FIG. 12E in which the start time of notification of different notification information is set for each day of the week is set. Is used to determine whether or not the current date and time coincide with the start time of the notification. When it is determined that it does not coincide with the notification set time, the process proceeds to S335 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it coincides with the set time of the notification, it is determined whether or not the notification is set to be executed (S332). Here, the meaning that the notification has been set to execute means that various data settings for executing the notification have been performed. Specifically, in S332, it is determined whether or not the notification has been set for execution based on whether or not a notification execution set flag indicating that the notification matching the set time has been set for execution has been set. To do.

  When it is determined that the notification has been set for execution, the process proceeds to S335 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification has not been set for execution, data for executing the notification is set (S333). Specifically, in S333, the event of the day shown in (b) of FIG. 18, the store manager push pad shown in (f) of FIG. 18, the recommended stand shown in (j) of FIG. 19, and the (e) of FIG. Data such as image data for displaying a notice such as a special effect notice and a special reach notice shown in FIG. 12E is set. Then, in response to the fact that the data for executing the notification is set in S332, the execution set flag of the notification is set (S334), and the process proceeds to S335. Thereby, when the notification is executed in S420 of FIG. 37 described later, the notification is executed based on the data set in S333.

  In S335, based on the date information acquired in S313 and the special effect information acquired in S317, it is determined whether or not the current date and time matches the special effect execution start time registered in the special effect information table. . Specifically, in S355, after determining the day of the week and determining whether it is a holiday based on the date and time information, a start time of a special effect that is different for each day of the week is set. Using the special effect information table of 12 (f), it is determined whether or not the current date and time match the special effect execution start time. Here, whether or not the day specified in the date and time information acquired in S313 is a holiday cannot be determined only by the time value of the RTCM 100 (the day of the week can be determined). The holiday data which is the data to be shown is stored. In S335, it is determined whether or not the day specified by the date and time information acquired in S313 is a holiday by using such holiday data. Thereby, when it is a holiday, a special effect is performed at the timing set about the holiday.

  If it is determined in S335 that the special effect execution start time is coincident, the special effect execution permission flag is set (S336), and the process proceeds to S338 described later. Here, the special effect execution permission flag refers to a flag that is set to permit execution of the special effect described above. When the special effect execution permission flag is set, the execution of the special effect is permitted, and when the special effect execution permission flag is not set, the execution of the special effect is not permitted. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not coincide with the special effect execution start time, the process proceeds to S338 described later.

  In S338, based on the date information acquired in S313 and the status selection information acquired in S318, it is determined whether or not the current date matches the timing for selecting the first status table.

  If it is determined that the time coincides with the timing for selecting the first state table, the first state flag is set (S339), and the process proceeds to S341 described later. Here, the first state flag refers to a flag that is set to select the first state table as a table used for selecting and determining the type of effect. When the first state flag is set, the first state table is used when the type of effect is selected and determined in the symbol variation start process of FIG. 35 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not coincide with the timing for selecting the first status table, that is, when it coincides with the timing for selecting the second status table, the second status flag is set (S340), and the process proceeds to S341 described later. . Here, the second state flag is a flag that is set for selecting the second state table as a table used for selecting and determining the type of effect. When the second state flag is set, the second state table is used when the type of effect is selected and determined in the symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In S341, based on the date information acquired in S313 and the simultaneous operation information acquired in S319, it is determined whether or not the current date matches the start time of the simultaneous demonstration display. When it is determined that it coincides with the start time of the simultaneous demonstration display, the simultaneous demonstration display flag is set (S342), and the process proceeds to S343. Here, the simultaneous demonstration display flag refers to a flag that is set when the simultaneous demonstration display is executed. When the simultaneous demonstration display flag is set, execution of simultaneous demonstration display is started in the demonstration display processing of FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not coincide with the start time of the simultaneous demonstration display, the process proceeds directly to S343.

  In S343, based on the date information acquired in S313 and the simultaneous operation information acquired in S319, it is determined whether or not the current date matches the end time of the simultaneous demonstration display. If it is determined that it coincides with the end time of the simultaneous demonstration display, the simultaneous demonstration display flag is reset (S344), and the process proceeds to S345. When the simultaneous demonstration display flag is reset, the execution of the simultaneous demonstration display is terminated in the demonstration display processing of FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not coincide with the end time of the simultaneous demonstration display, the process proceeds to S345 as it is.

  In S345, based on the date / time information acquired in S313 and the simultaneous operation information acquired in S319, it is determined whether or not the current date / time coincides with the simultaneous production start time. When it is determined that it coincides with the start time of the simultaneous performance, a simultaneous performance flag is set (S346), and the process proceeds to S347. Here, the simultaneous effect flag refers to a flag that is set when the simultaneous effect is executed. When the simultaneous effect flag is set, execution of the simultaneous effect is started in the simultaneous effect process of FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not coincide with the start time of the simultaneous performance, the process proceeds to S347 as it is.

  In S347, based on the date / time information acquired in S313 and the simultaneous operation information acquired in S319, it is determined whether or not the current date / time matches the simultaneous effect end time. When it is determined that it coincides with the start time of the simultaneous performance, the simultaneous performance flag is reset (S348), and the process returns. When the simultaneous effect flag is reset, the execution of the simultaneous effect is ended in the simultaneous effect process of FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not coincide with the end time of the simultaneous performance, the process returns.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the operation start date and time setting process in S321 of FIG. In the operation start date and time setting process, the following process is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned continuous operation time measurement flag is set (S361). If it is determined that the continuous operation time measurement flag is not set, the time value (year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second) of the RTCM 100 at that time is based on the date / time information acquired in S313. ) Is stored in the continuous operation time measurement start storage area provided in the RAM 354 (S372). Then, the continuous operation time measurement flag is set (S373), and the process returns. As a result, the time measurement for setting the operation start date and time is started from the start of the continuous operation time measurement stored in S372. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous operation time measurement flag is set, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (S362).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to S364 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command reception flag is set, a variation count counter (initial value) is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol and decorative symbol variation display is performed during continuous operation time measurement The value is “0”) and “1” is added and updated (S363), and the process proceeds to S364.

  In S364, the continuous operation time as the elapsed time from the start of the continuous operation time measurement is calculated based on the date / time information acquired in S313 and the information at the start of the continuous operation time measurement stored in the RAM 354. (S364). Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation time obtained in S364 has reached a predetermined operation start time determination value (for example, 2 hours) (S365). When it is determined that the operation start determination value has not been reached, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation start determination value has been reached, it is determined whether or not the value of the above-described variation number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined operation determination value (for example, once) (S366). . The operation determination value may be set once or may be set a plurality of times.

  When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter is not equal to or greater than the operation determination value, it is determined that it is not in the operation state, and is stored in the RAM 354 in order to initialize unnecessary data in the subsequent processing. The data at the start of continuous operation time measurement is deleted (S370), and the continuous operation time measurement flag is reset (S371). At that time, the value of the variation counter is reset to the initial value (not shown). Then return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter is greater than or equal to the operation determination value, it is determined that the operation state is in operation, and is registered (stored as an operation start date and time in an operation start date and time storage area provided in the RAM 354. (S367). Then, in response to the registration of the operation start date and time, the aforementioned operation start date and time set flag is set (S368).

  Next, based on the information of the operation start date and time registered in S367, an operation period-specific effect selection information table, a state selection information table, a project execution information table, a project notice information table, a notice information table, and a special effect shown in FIG. Processing for setting various types of management information, such as creating the information table and the simultaneous operation information table by the method described above, is performed (S369), and the process returns. The data table created in S369 is a data table in which default values of various data as described above are set. Thereafter, the data in each data table is obtained by executing the processing of S311 and S312 in FIG. Based on data input from the setting operation unit 355, any change can be made. In this way, each data of the production selection information table by operation period, the state selection information table, the project execution information table, the project notice information table, the notification information table, the special production information table, and the simultaneous operation information table is registered. The operation start date and time is set as the reference date and time.

  In S369, for example, as the effect selection information table by operation period, the first operation period from the registered operation start date and time to the day of the third week (day after 21 days) is the fourth from the registered operation start date and time. From the day of the week (day after 21 days) to the day of the sixth week (day after 42 days), from the day of the seventh week (day after 42 days) from the registered operation start date and time The production selection information table by operation period in which the operation period is set such that the day until the ninth week (the day after 63 days) is the fourth operation period is created (see FIG. 12A).

  Further, as the state selection information table, a production selection information table by operation period in which a first state table is set for Monday and a second state table is set for every day from Tuesday to Sunday is created based on the registered operation start date and time. (See (b) of FIG. 12).

  Also, as the project execution information table, the date and time 21 days after the registered operation start date and time is the execution date and time of project 1, the date and time 42 days after the registered operation start date and time is the execution date and time of project 2, and the registered operation start time An effect selection information table by operating period in which the date and time 63 days after the date and time is set as the execution date and time of the project 3 is created (see (c) of FIG. 12).

  As for the project notice information table, for each of registered project 1, project 2, and project 3, etc., the date and time four days before the execution date and time is the date and time of the first notice and the date and time three days before the execution date and time. 2 The date and time of the previous notice, the date and time two days before the execution date and time is the date and time of the third notice, the date and time one day before the execution date and time is the fourth notice, the date and time six hours before the execution date and time is the date and time of the fifth notice 3 A project notice information table in which the date and time before the time is set as the date and time of the sixth notice, and the date and time one hour before the execution date and time is set as the date and time of the seventh notice is created (see FIG. 12D).

  In addition, the notification information table is based on the registered operation start date and time, and the event is announced today at the first predetermined time on Sunday, and the store manager pushes the announcement at the second predetermined time on Sunday. Thursday, Friday, Sunday A notification information table in which a recommended announcement is set at the third predetermined time, a special performance notice is set at the fourth predetermined time every day from Monday to Sunday, and a special reach notice is set at the fifth predetermined time every day from Monday to Sunday. It is created (see (e) of FIG. 12).

  Further, as the special effect information table, the first special effect is set at the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time every day from Monday to Sunday (including holidays) on the basis of the registered operation start date and time. Then, a special effect information table in which the second special effect is set at the third predetermined time and the fourth predetermined time on Saturday, Sunday and public holidays is created (see (f) of FIG. 12).

  The simultaneous operation information table is based on the registered operation start date and time, and is displayed on the first predetermined time on a daily basis from Monday to Sunday (1) and on the second predetermined time. 2) A simultaneous operation information table is created in which the simultaneous effect (1) is set at the third predetermined time and the simultaneous effect (2) is set at the fourth predetermined time (see (g) of FIG. 12).

  FIG. 33 shows an example in which it is determined that the operation state is established when the continuous operation time reaches the predetermined time and the variation pattern command is received a predetermined number of times or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a condition for determining that it is in an operating state, for example, during a first set time in which a state where a variation pattern command is received at least once every 10 minutes continues for 2 hours Other conditions such as a condition that the state in which the variation pattern command is received at least once continues for a second set time longer than the first set time may be used. In other words, as a condition for determining that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an operating state, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operating is determined by grasping the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such that a change display is executed. Any condition can be used. Therefore, an effect control command other than a variation pattern command such as a symbol information command and a symbol stop command may be used as a command that can capture the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the simultaneous effect processing in S207 of FIG. In the simultaneous effect process, the following process is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the aforementioned simultaneous effect flag is set (S381). When it is determined that the simultaneous performance flag is not set, the process proceeds to S385 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the simultaneous effect flag is set, the simultaneous effect by the lamp effect using the decoration lamp 25, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c as described above is executed. (S382). Then, it is determined whether or not the simultaneous performance priority execution flag is set (S383). Here, the simultaneous performance priority execution flag refers to a flag that is set when a simultaneous performance is preferentially executed with respect to an effect using a lamp such as the decoration lamp 25. When the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is set, a process for displaying an image in the effect control process (design variation start processing, symbol variation processing, symbol stop wait processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot game processing, which will be described later, and In relation to the effect using the lamp such as the decoration lamp 25 performed in the big hit game end process), the normally used lamp driving effect (hereinafter referred to as normal lamp effect) is prohibited, and the simultaneous effect is preferentially executed. . That is, even if an effect using a lamp is being executed based on the execution of a variable display or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when it is time to execute a simultaneous effect, the normal lamp effect being executed is interrupted. Simultaneous production using lamps is preferentially executed. However, the image display such as the variable display image in the effect control process is maintained as it is. As a result, on the gaming machine installation island 200, regardless of the performance execution status of each pachinko gaming machine 1, all the pachinko gaming machines 1 in the gaming machine installation island 200 can be executed simultaneously. .

  If it is determined in S383 that the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is not set, the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is set (S384), and the process returns. Thereby, the simultaneous production priority execution flag is set at the start of the simultaneous production. On the other hand, when it is determined in S383 that the simultaneous performance priority execution flag is set, the process directly returns.

  If it is determined in S381 that the simultaneous effect flag is not set and the process proceeds to S385, it is determined whether or not the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is set (S385). When it is determined that the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is set, the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is reset (S386), and the process returns. As a result, the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is reset at the end of the simultaneous effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in S385 that the simultaneous performance priority execution flag is not set, the process directly returns.

  Next, the effect control process according to S208 in FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the effect control process. In the effect control process, the special effect process in S400a is executed, and any one of S400 to S407 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  In the effect control process, first, the special effect process for performing the special effect described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24 is executed when the condition for executing the special effect is satisfied (S400a). The contents of the special effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, any one of S400 to S407 as described below is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag.

  Variation pattern command reception waiting process (S400): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received. When it is confirmed that a variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the symbol variation start process of S402. Update to the corresponding value. When it is confirmed that the demo display command has been received without receiving the variation pattern command, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the demo display process in S401 after the transition condition to the demo display process is satisfied. Update. The contents of the variation pattern command reception waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Demo display processing (S401): When the fluctuation pattern command is not received for a predetermined time after the demonstration display command is received, that is, the variable storage display is “0” for the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). If not, the above-described normal demo display is executed in the demo display process. Further, when the condition for executing the simultaneous demonstration display is satisfied, the aforementioned simultaneous demonstration display is executed. When the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol variation start process in S402. The contents of the demonstration display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Symbol variation start processing (S402): For variation display of decorative symbols, variation display results (combination of stop symbols) and variation patterns are obtained based on data used to start variation display such as the received symbol information command and variation pattern command. Select to start the variable display. More specifically, the production control microcomputer 800 uses the determination method as described above based on the received data such as the symbol information command and the variation pattern command to determine the combination of the off symbol and the jackpot symbol. Select the display result of the decorative pattern in the variable display. In addition, the production control microcomputer 800 stores a data table indicating the correspondence between the variation pattern command and the variation pattern of the decorative design selected in accordance with the variation pattern command in the control ROM 84. Based on the relationship set in (1), the variation pattern to be executed is selected corresponding to the received variation pattern command.

  In the symbol variation start process, the variation pattern is selected as described above, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a table that is used to select an effect type selected according to the variation pattern depending on the day of the week. Is set to For this reason, in the symbol variation start process, when selecting the type of each of the big hit and the lost reach, it is determined which of the first state flag and the second state flag is set. Check and select the table with the flag set, and use that table to determine the type of effect to be performed. Thereby, according to a day of the week, the day which can select special reach, and the day which cannot select special reach can be provided.

  In the symbol variation start process, the variation display time is set according to the variation pattern selected and determined, and the variation of the decorative symbol (left, middle, right symbol) in the variation display device 9 is started. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the process during symbol variation of S403.

  Symbol variation processing (S403): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed, etc.) constituting the variation display variation pattern on the variation display device 9 and monitors the end of the set variation time. Then, when the set variation time is over, for example, the left, middle and right symbols of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and control is performed to change to a fluctuation variation state in which the symbols are swaying without confirming the display result. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol stop waiting process in S404. In addition, when the change display by the first special jackpot reach or the second special jackpot reach shown in FIG. 11 is performed, the combination of the big hit symbols is temporarily stopped and then changed again while configuring the big hit symbol combination. The display is started, and a promotion effect for informing whether or not the combination of probability variation big hit symbols is achieved is performed.

  Symbol stop waiting process (S404): When the symbol display command instructing all symbols to be stopped has been received after the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed, the variation display device 9 displays the variation of the ornament symbol. Control is performed to stop (for example, stop the above-described fluctuation state) and derive and display a stop symbol as a fluctuation display result. Thereafter, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is a jackpot display result, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing in S405. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol stop symbol on the variation display device 9 results in a display error, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process in S400. Furthermore, in the symbol stop waiting process, immediately before indicating whether or not the immediately preceding (previous) variation display is a variation display in which a big hit gaming state has been reached in the variation pattern command reception waiting process that shifts after the symbol stop waiting process ends. As the change display data, the immediately before shift data indicating that the previous change display has become a shift display result is stored in the RAM 85.

  Big hit display process (S405): Based on the reception of the big hit start command, the display at the start of the big hit is performed when the big win gaming state is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9 is completed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing of S406.

  Big hit game processing (S406): Control for displaying the big hit game effect, which is a display for producing the big hit game state. For example, display for performing various effects during each round in the big hit gaming state and various effects during the interval period between each round is performed. When the big hit game in-process is ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game end process in S407.

  Big hit game end process (S407): Based on the reception of the big hit game end command, an ending display is performed as an effect when the big hit game state is ended. Further, based on the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot end command, probability / base state data indicating which state the current gaming state belongs to is a low probability low base state or a high probability high base state is stored in the RAM 85. To do. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process in S400. As such probability / base state data, data indicating a low probability low base state is stored as an initial value, and thereafter rewritten every time a big hit gaming state occurs. When it is indicated that the jackpot is normally based on the jackpot end command, data indicating the low probability base state is stored as probability / base state data. Further, when it is shown that the probability change big hit is based on the big hit end command, data indicating the high probability high base state is stored. Further, in the big hit game end process, the previous fluctuation indicating whether or not the previous fluctuation display as described above in the fluctuation pattern reception waiting process that is shifted after the big hit game end process is the big hit gaming state is shown. As the display data, the previous big hit data indicating that the last fluctuation display has become the big hit display result is stored in the RAM 85. The immediately preceding jackpot data in this case is data that can specify which kind of jackpot, a probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, based on the jackpot end command.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the special effect process in S400a of FIG. In the special effect process, the following process is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the special effect execution permission flag is set (S480). When it is determined that the special effect execution permission flag is not set, the process returns to prevent the special effect from being executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect execution permission flag is set, it is determined whether or not the current state is the big hit gaming state (S481). Specifically, in S481, when the value of the process flag used in the effect control process is a value corresponding to one of the big hit display process (S405) to the big hit game end process (S407), It is determined that the game is in progress.

  If it is determined in S481 that the game is in the big hit game state, the process returns because no special performance is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S481 that the variable display or the big hit gaming state is not being executed, the first special effect execution flag or the second special effect that is a flag indicating that the first special effect is being executed is executed. It is determined whether or not the second special effect execution flag, which is a flag indicating that it is in the middle, is set (S482). Here, the first special effect execution flag is set in S485 described later at the start of the first special effect. The second special effect execution flag is set in S487 described later at the start of the second special effect. It should be noted that the special effect may not be started not only during the big hit gaming state but also during the decorative display variation display. Also, the special effect may not be performed during execution of a specific effect (special effect) that is determined in advance, such as a special effect is not performed during the display of the special reach or the special reach. In addition, special effects may not be performed during the probability change state. In addition, special effects may not be performed during the time-short state. Also, special effects may be performed in any state, including during the big hit gaming state. However, in such a case, as the special effect, it is preferable to execute an effect that changes only a specific effect that is normally performed, such as changing a background image without performing a mission effect.

  When it is determined that the first special effect execution flag or the second special effect execution flag is not set, the execution of the special effect is permitted, but the execution of the special effect is not yet started. In this state, it is necessary to start either the first special effect or the second special effect. When it is determined in S482 that either the first special effect execution flag or the second special effect execution flag is set, the special effect is being executed, and the process proceeds to S489 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S482 that the first special effect execution flag or the second special effect execution flag is not set, in order to determine whether to start the first special effect or the second special effect Among the special effects shown in the special effect information acquired in S317 of the specific information management process, from the current time among the times before the current time specified by the current date and time information acquired in S313 of the specific information management process Which of the first special effect and the second special effect is set as a special effect that is set to start at a close time (may be the same time as the current time or a time before the current time)? It is determined whether or not it is at the start of the first special effect (S483). As described above, since the special effect cannot be executed during the big hit game state, even if the special effect execution permission flag is set at the time when the special effect is executed in the big hit game state, the big hit game It is executed waiting for the state to end. As a result, the special effect may be executed at a time later than the time set by the special effect information table. Therefore, in S483, the time before the current time is started at a time closer to the current time. For the set special effect, it is determined whether the first special effect or the second special effect.

  If it is determined at S483 that the first special effect is to be started, the process for starting the first special effect is performed (S484). In S484, the contents of the mission of the first special effect are selected and determined at random based on the count value extracted from the RW as shown below from a plurality of predetermined missions, and data indicating the determined mission type Is stored in the RAM 85. In this embodiment, the basic achievement condition of the mission of the first special effect is that the reach in the symbol selected and determined at random based on the count value extracted from the RW appears within 20 minutes. In S484, the count value is extracted from the RW, and the count value from the RW and the type of mission (for example, the first mission, “2”, which is the achievement condition to reach with the symbol “1”) The second mission, where the achievement is to reach the symbol, the third mission, where the achievement is to reach the symbol (3), and the reach of the symbol (4) 4th mission, which is the achievement condition, 5th mission, which is to reach with the symbol “5”, and 6th mission, which is to achieve the reach with the symbol “6” , The 7th mission, which is achieved by reaching with the symbol “7”, the 8th mission, where reaching the design with the symbol “8” is the achieving condition, and the “9” symbol. Reaching reach The first mission selection data in which a relationship with the ninth mission, which is a condition, and a plurality of types of missions such as a tenth mission, which is the achievement condition is to reach with a symbol of “0” Using the table, the type of mission to be executed is selected and determined, and mission type data indicating the determined type of mission is stored in the RAM 85. Then, in S484, depending on the type of mission selected and determined, for example, a first special effect start display as shown in (a1) of FIG. 20 (“Reach out with 7 within 20 minutes!”). Display), the mission achievement condition is displayed, and the color of the background image is changed to a predetermined color as a color during the period during which the first special effect is performed. With respect to the effect display at the start of the mission effect, the first special effect start display is displayed on the entire screen of the variable display device 9 as shown in FIG. To display. On the other hand, in the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the effect display at the start of the mission effect is a part of the screen of the variation display device 9 (see FIG. 21 etc.) displayed as the first special effect start display. The area is assigned as an area, and the first special effect start display image is reduced and displayed in the assigned display area.

  Note that the types of missions in the first special performance may be selected by selecting a plurality of types of missions with different mission period conditions in the mission achievement conditions. The mission period conditions and the reach symbol conditions A plurality of types of missions different from each other may be provided and selected.

  Next, the aforementioned first special effect execution flag is set (S485), and the process proceeds to S488, which will be described later. Thus, setting the first special effect execution flag indicates that the first special effect is being executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S483 that it is not the start time of the first special effect, it is the start time of the second special effect, and the process for starting the second special effect as described above is performed (S486). . Specifically, in S486, the contents of the mission of the second special effect are selected and determined at random based on the count value extracted from the RW as shown below from a plurality of types of missions determined in advance. Data indicating the type is stored in the RAM 85. In this embodiment, the basic achievement condition of the mission of the second special effect is to cause a symbol selected and determined at random based on the count value extracted from the RW to appear in the left variation display area within 20 minutes. . In S486, the count value is extracted from the RW, and the count value from the RW and the type of mission (for example, the first mission, “1” in the left variation display area, which is the achievement condition, “ The second mission whose achievement condition is to issue the symbol “2”, the third mission whose achievement condition is to issue the symbol “3”, and the fourth mission whose achievement condition is to issue the symbol “4” The mission of 5th mission, which is the achievement condition to give the symbol of "5", the sixth mission which is the achievement condition of to issue the symbol of "6", and the achievement condition of giving the symbol of "7" The seventh mission, the eighth mission whose achievement condition is to issue the symbol “8”, the ninth mission whose achievement condition is to issue the symbol “9”, and the symbol “0” Is an achievement condition Mission type data indicating the type of mission determined by selecting and determining the type of mission to be executed using the second mission selection data table in which a relationship with a plurality of types of missions such as the tenth mission is set) Is stored in the RAM 85. In S486, depending on the type of mission selected and determined, for example, a second special effect start display as shown in (b4) of FIG. 20 (“Stop 7 to the left within 20 minutes!”). Display), the mission achievement condition is displayed, and the color of the background image is changed to a predetermined color as the color during the period during which the second special effect is performed. With respect to the effect display at the start of the mission effect, the second special effect start display is displayed on the entire screen of the variable display device 9 as shown in FIG. To display. On the other hand, in the state in which the decorative pattern variation display is being executed, the effect display at the start of the mission effect is a part of the screen of the variation display device 9 (see FIG. 21 etc.) displayed as the second special effect start display. Assigned as an area, the image of the second special effect start display is reduced and displayed in the assigned display area.

  Next, the second special effect execution flag is set (S487), and the process proceeds to S488 described later. By setting the second special effect execution flag in this way, it is indicated that the second special effect is being executed.

  In S488, based on the date / time information read in S313, the current time is stored in the RAM 85 as special effect start time data, which is data indicating the time when the special effect is started, and the process returns. Here, the special effect start time data is data used to measure the mission execution time, which is the time during which the special effect is being executed, based on the time value of the RTCM 100. Specify the time. For example, when the time value of the RTCM 100 reaches the time when 20 minutes have elapsed from the time stored as the special effect start time data, it can be determined that the special effect end condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S482 that either the first special effect execution flag or the second special effect execution flag is set, one of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed. In step S489, it is determined whether an end condition for the special effect being executed is satisfied.

  Specifically, in S489, the first end condition that a big hit has occurred within a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) from the start of the special effect and the time value of the RTCM 100 read in S313 are the time when the special effect starts. When one of the second end conditions, that is, when a predetermined time (20 minutes) has elapsed since the time stored as data, is satisfied, it is determined that the special effect end condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, the first end condition is satisfied when the mission is achieved when the mission is achieved even when the effect control command for designating the big hit is received (see FIG. 21G). If it is not achieved, it is established when the big hit game is started or when the big hit game is finished (see FIGS. 24G and 24H).

  If it is not determined in S489 that the special effect end condition is satisfied, the process returns to continue the special effect. On the other hand, when it is determined in S489 that the special effect end condition is satisfied, the effect control process flag is set to wait for the reception of the variation pattern command in order to determine whether or not the execution state of the effect is a state for ending the special effect. It is determined whether the process or the demonstration display process is indicated (S490). In other words, when the special effect ends due to the first end condition, the effect execution state convenient for ending the special effect is when the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, when the special effect is ended due to the second end condition, for example, when the variable display is not executed, such as when the variable display that is out of the display ends, the demonstration display is not performed because the variable display is not performed. This is a time when the display is not performed, and when the demonstration display is not performed because the variable display is not performed. Therefore, in S490, when the effect control process flag indicates the variation pattern reception waiting process or the demo display process, it is determined that the execution state of the effect is a state in which the special effect is ended.

  If it is determined in S490 that the effect control process flag does not indicate the variation pattern command reception waiting process or the demo display process, the process returns. In S490, even if the special control process flag indicates other processing (for example, symbol variation processing, jackpot display processing, etc.) different from the variation pattern command reception waiting processing or the demo display processing, S491 You may comprise so that it may progress to this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S490 that the effect control process flag indicates the variation pattern command reception waiting process or the demo display process, a process for ending the special effect as shown in FIG. 22 is performed (S491). In S491, the color of the background image is changed from the color during the period where the special effect is performed to the color when the normal effect is performed. In S491, when the special production end condition is satisfied based on the above-described second end condition being satisfied, "20 minutes have elapsed" as shown in FIG. 22 (e) and FIG. 22 (f). A message indicating that a mission such as “sorry” could not be achieved is displayed.

  Then, the set special effect execution permission flag is reset (S492), and the set first special effect execution flag or the second special effect execution flag is reset (S493). Then, the special effect start time data stored in S488 is reset (erased) (S494), and the process returns. Thereby, in order to execute the next special effect, the data used for this special effect is reset.

  In the special effect process of FIG. 36, when the special effect execution permission flag is set and the special effect execution flag is not set when the big hit gaming state is not set (when Y in S482). The example in which the special effect is always executed by S484 or S486 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the special performance execution permission flag is set and the special performance execution flag is not set when the big hit gaming state is not set (when Y in S482), for example, a predetermined Whether or not to execute (start) the special effect may be determined at random by a predetermined determination method such as using a random counter. The determination as to whether or not to execute (start) the special effect may be performed every time the special effect process is executed, or every time a predetermined time elapses or the special and decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Alternatively, it may be performed every time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, such as every time when is started.

  In addition, as the mission period of the special effect, an example is shown in which the second end condition is satisfied when 20 minutes have elapsed from the time of starting the execution of the special effect stored in S488. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the mission period of the special effect, the end time of the special effect is set in advance in the special effect information table, and the second end condition is set when the time value of the RTCM 100 reaches the end time. May be established. Further, the special effect may not be performed not only during the big hit gaming state but also when the decorative symbol variation display is executed. Further, the special effect may be ended at any timing without executing the above-described processing of S490. Further, the special effect may not be executed when it cannot be started at the set start time, for example, when a preset start time is reached during the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process in S400 of FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the following process is performed.

  In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received by determining whether or not a variation pattern command reception flag that is set when a variation pattern command is received is set. (S410).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to S433 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the demo display command reception flag is set (S411). The demonstration display command reception flag is a flag that is set when a demonstration display command is received. When it is determined that the demo display command reception flag is set, the value of the waiting time timer is initialized to be set to a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) (S411a), and the process proceeds to S412. Here, the waiting time timer is for performing a demonstration display for displaying a predetermined image when the variation display device 9 has not performed the variation display of the symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) or more. It is a counter that measures the time (non-fluctuating time) during which the symbol is not displayed. When a demonstration display command is received, for example, a count value corresponding to 60 seconds is set as an initial value, and the waiting time timer is decremented and updated by 1 each time S423 described later is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo display command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to S412.

  In S412, it is determined whether or not the specific information display flag is set (S412). The specific information display flag is a flag indicating that specific information, which is information relating to a project, project advance notice, or notification, is being displayed. When it is determined that the specific information display flag is set, the process proceeds to S428 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific information display flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the project execution set flag is set (S413). The project execution set flag is a flag that is set in S330 of FIG. 32 described above when data for executing the project is set based on the date and time when the project is performed.

  If it is determined that the project execution set flag is set, the project is executed based on the data for executing the set project (S414), and the project execution set flag is reset (S415). In S414, for example, in order to change the effect type, the project having the contents set in the project execution information table is executed, such as changing the effect type selection data as described above. For example, when the project as shown in FIG. 16D is executed, the production type selection data is changed, and the production type selection data is confirmed at that time based on the change. Based on this, the basic screen and the effect image displayed on the variable display device 9 by the effect control microcomputer 800 are changed. Then, the above-described specific information display flag is set (S422), and the process returns.

  As described above, when the project execution set flag is set, the set project is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S413 that the project execution setting completed flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the project notice execution setting completed flag is set (S416). The project notice execution set flag is a flag that is set in S325 of FIG. 32 described above when data for executing the project notice is set based on the date and time when the project notice is made. .

  If it is determined that the project notice execution set flag is set, the project notice is executed based on the data for executing the set project notice (S417), and the project notice execution set flag is reset (S417). S418). Then, the above-described specific information display flag is set (S422), and the process returns. Thus, when the project notice execution setting completion flag is set, the set project notice is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S416 that the project notice execution set flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the notice execution set flag is set (S419). The notification execution set flag is a flag that is set in S334 of FIG. 32 described above when the setting for executing the notification is made based on the date and time when notification is made.

  When it is determined that the notification execution set flag is set, the notification is executed based on the data for executing the set notification (S420), and the notification execution set flag is reset (S421). Then, the above-described specific information display flag is set (S422), and the process returns.

  As described above, when the effect is displayed at the time of executing the project, when the project notice is executed, or when the notice is executed, the specific information display flag is set. Then, until the specific information display flag is reset in S430, which will be described later, the processing in S413 to S421 is not performed according to the determination in S412. Thereby, in such a case, the effect display at the time of executing the project, the time of executing the project notice, or the time of executing the notice is continuously performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification execution set flag is not set, the above-described waiting time timer is updated (S423). As a result, the waiting time timer is decremented and updated by 1 each time S430 is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting time timer becomes “0” and the waiting time timer has expired (S424).

  If it is determined that the waiting time timer has not expired, it is determined whether or not there is a selectable effect type at present (S425). Specifically, in S425, when the performance types A2 and B2 can be selected by executing the project 2 described above, and the performance types A3, B3, and C1 can be selected by executing the project 3 described above. It is determined that there is a selectable effect type when it is in a selectable effect type. More specifically, the date and time of the current time value read from the RTCM 100 in S313 are, for example, the third operation period (the effect types A2 and B2 can be selected) and the fourth operation period (the effect types A3 and A3). It is determined that there is a selectable effect type when the effect type such as (B3, C1 can be selected) corresponds to a selectable period. If it is determined that there is no currently selectable production type, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a selectable effect type, an effect type selection process is performed in which the player selects the effect type and performs a process for selecting the effect type according to the player's selection ( S426), return. The contents of the effect type selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in S424 that the waiting time timer has expired, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the demonstration display process (S401) (S427), and the process returns. Thereby, when the waiting time timer expires, the effect control process shifts to the process of the demo display process, and the demo display is started.

  Thus, when the variation pattern command is not received, the project notice execution is executed when the project notice execution set flag is set, and the project is executed when the project notice execution set flag is set, When the notification execution set flag is set, the notification is executed. When the variation pattern command has not been received and the project advance execution set flag, the project execution set flag, and the notification execution set flag are not set, the waiting time counter expires. The demo display is executed based on the transition to the demo display processing. Further, when there is an effect type that can be selected as the project progresses before the waiting time counter has timed up, a process for selecting the effect type according to the player's selection is performed.

  When the execution times of the project, the project notice, and the notification executed in this way are duplicated, as shown in S413 to S421, the project, the project notice, and the notification are set to be executed in the order. If an effect that is set to be executed is executed, then the process returns without determining whether or not it is set to be executed for the subsequent effects. Projects are executed in order from the highest priority, such as project> project notice> notification.

  The priority in this case is determined in advance according to the following criteria. For example, since the project type is changed and the execution date and time is notified to the player by the project notice, the project has the highest priority because changing the time may cause the player to be dissatisfied. Is expensive. Further, since the project notice is a notice related to the project, it has the next highest priority after the project. In addition, the announcement includes information such as a foothold that will be advantageous to the player, but even if the execution time is slightly changed, there will be no significant disadvantage for the player. high. Such priorities are not limited to such an order, and may be set in any order.

  If it is determined in S412 that the specific information display flag is set, the specific information display timer is updated (S428), and the value of the specific information display timer is set to “0” to display the specific information. It is determined whether or not the timer has expired (S429). Here, the specific information display timer is a time during which the display of the specific information displayed on the variable display device 9 by the execution of the project, the project advance notice, or the notification in the variable display device 9 is continued. Is a counter that measures the time from the start of the project, project advance notice, or announcement effect display. In the specific information display timer, for example, a count value corresponding to 20 minutes is set as an initial value, and is subtracted and updated by 1 each time S428 is executed. The specific information display timer is set to an initial value (a count value corresponding to 20 minutes is set as an initial value) when the power is turned on, and thereafter, when a variation pattern command reception waiting process is executed. When the variation pattern command is not received before the time is up, it is initialized (a count value corresponding to 20 minutes is set as an initial value) when the time is up (S431 described later). The specific information display timer is initially set at the timing when the display of specific information is started, such as when Y is determined in S413, Y is determined in S416, and Y is determined in S419. It may be made to be.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command reception waiting process is being executed and the variation pattern command is received before the specific information display timer expires, the effect control process performs the symbol variation start process and the subsequent processes. However, the specific information display timer is also updated in the processes in the processes after the symbol variation start process, and is initialized when the time is up (a count value corresponding to 20 minutes is set as an initial value). Is done.

  If it is determined that the specific information display timer has not expired, the process returns. If it is determined that the specific information display timer has not timed up, as shown in S435, which will be described later, if a variation pattern command has not been received, the specific information display flag is not reset and S413 to S421 are executed. Since it is not performed, the display of the project being executed, the project advance notice, or the notice is continued. In this way, the special information that has been executed in S414, S417, and S420 until it is determined in S412 that the specific information display flag is set and the specific information display timer times out in S429. Is continuously displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific information display timer has expired, the specific information display flag is reset (S430), and the specific information display timer is initialized to an initial value (a count value corresponding to 20 minutes) ( S431). When the variation pattern command reception waiting process is executed as described above, the variation pattern command is received by the time the specific information display timer expires, and the effect control process performs the symbol variation start process and the subsequent processes. When the process proceeds to the process, the specific information display flag is reset when the specific information display timer is initialized. Then, by performing the process of executing the display of the normal effect (S432), the effect display at the time of executing the project, at the time of executing the project notice, or at the time of executing the notice ends, for example, (c) in FIG. ) To (e) and (g) to (i) and (k) to (n) in FIG. After S432, the process returns.

  If it is determined in S410 that the variation pattern command has been received and the process proceeds to S433, it is determined whether the specific information display flag is set (S433). When it is determined that the specific information display flag is set, the specific information being displayed is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen in the variable display device 9 (S434), and the process proceeds to S435. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific information display flag is not set, the process proceeds to S435. As described above, since the specific information display timer is updated in the processes in the processes after the symbol variation start process, the specific information displayed in a reduced manner in S434 is continued until the specific information display timer expires. Is displayed. When the specific information is displayed in a reduced size and the specific information display timer has timed out, the processing similar to S430 to S432 is performed, and the display of the specific information is terminated. Further, when the specific information is displayed in a reduced size, if the specific information display timer does not time out before the end of the variable display, the number of reserved memories is “0” at the end of the variable display. Then, control for returning the specific information to the original size (display size in the entire display screen) is performed.

  In S435, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol variation start process (S401), and the process returns. Thereby, when the variation pattern command is received, the effect control process shifts to the process of the symbol variation start process, and the variation display is started. By starting the variable display in this way, for example, when the effect display is performed at the time of executing the project, the project notice, or the announcement, the effect display is ended. Then, for example, a normal effect in which a variable display is performed as shown in (d) of FIG. 16, (c) of FIG. 18, (g) and (k) of FIG. Further, when the variable display is started when the normal effect is being performed, the normal effect is continued as it is.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect type selection process in S426 of FIG. In the effect type selection process, the following process is performed. First, an effect type selection screen as shown in FIGS. 17E to 17G is displayed on the variable display device 9 (S451). Then, it is determined whether or not there has been a selection switching operation by the player operating the selection button 358 (S452). S452 includes both functions of a process of starting display of the effect type selection screen and a process of continuing display of the effect type selection screen after the display of the effect type selection screen is started. After the display of the effect type selection screen is started, the variation pattern command reception waiting process is executed until it is determined in S424 in FIG. 37 that the waiting time timer has expired or a variation pattern command is received. Each time S451 is executed, the display of the effect type selection screen is started and the display of the effect type selection screen is continued.

  When it is determined that there has been a selection switching operation, the selected effect type is switched to another effect type according to the operation (S453), and the process returns. Specifically, in S453, based on the above-described effect type selection data, the effect control data and image data used for effect display are prioritized in the following order of priority (mounting effect, sea effect, and city effect). Are changed to effect control data and image data corresponding to the effect type. As a result, as described above, the displayed basic screen changes to the basic screen of the effect type after switching, and the effect image selected in the future changes to the effect image of the effect type after switching. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection switching operation has not been performed, the currently selected effect type (including the effect type selected in the initial setting) is held (S454), and the process returns. Thereby, the type of the displayed basic screen is held, and the type of effect image to be selected in the future is held.

  Note that when the execution times of projects, project notices, and announcements overlap, the effects with the overlapping execution times are not displayed in order from the highest priority as described above. You may make it display. For example, as described above, in the process of setting data for executing these effects (S324, S329, and S333 in FIG. 32 described above), effects with overlapping execution times are displayed together in one screen. In this manner, data for executing the production is set. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the following process is performed. The process proceeds to S416 after S415, and to S419 after S418. Then, the processing related to the specific information display flag such as S412 and S430 is not performed. In this way, it is possible to perform effect display with overlapping execution times in one screen.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the demo display process in S401 of FIG. In the demonstration display process, the following process is performed. First, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (S461). When it is determined that the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the process proceeds to S465 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the above-described simultaneous demonstration display flag is set (S462).

  When it is determined that the simultaneous demonstration display flag is set, processing for executing the simultaneous demonstration display as shown in FIG. 15 is performed (S463), and the process returns. Thereby, the simultaneous demonstration display as described above is performed. Note that S463 includes both processing for starting the simultaneous demonstration display and processing for continuing the simultaneous demonstration display thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the simultaneous demonstration display flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the aforementioned simultaneous performance priority execution flag is set (S463a). In addition, as shown in S410aY of FIG. 37 and S461Y of FIG. 39, the simultaneous demonstration display by S463 in FIG. 39 is executed when the fluctuation pattern command is received and the fluctuation display is executed, because S463 is not executed. It is forbidden.

When it is determined that the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is not set, the process for executing the normal demonstration display as described above is performed (S464), and the process returns. Thereby, the normal demonstration display as described above is performed. Note that S464 includes both a process for starting the normal demonstration display and a process for continuing the normal demonstration display thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the simultaneous production priority execution flag is set, it is necessary to preferentially execute the simultaneous production by the lamp driving as described above, so that the normal lamp production is prohibited in the normal demonstration display ( After that, processing for executing normal demonstration display is performed (S464), and the process returns. Thus, during the normal demonstration display, the lamp driving mode is not a normal light emission pattern but a light emission pattern for simultaneous performance executed in S382 as described above, and the decoration lamp 25, the ceiling lamp 28a, and the left When the frame lamp 28b and the right frame lamp 28c are driven and controlled, a normal demonstration display image is displayed on the variable display device 9, and a simultaneous effect in which the lamps are driven and controlled with a light emission pattern for the simultaneous effect. Done. In S463b, it is determined that the simultaneous performance priority execution flag is set in S463a, and after the normal lamp driving is first prohibited, the prohibition state is maintained.

  Also, the above-described symbol variation start processing (S402), symbol variation processing (S403), symbol stop waiting processing (S404), jackpot display processing (S405), jackpot game in-progress processing (S406), and jackpot game end processing ( In each of S407), the same processing as S463a and S463b described above is performed, and when the simultaneous effect priority execution flag is set, when the image display is performed in each effect process, The normal lamp effect is prohibited, and the decorative lamp 25 is driven and controlled with the light emission pattern for the simultaneous effect executed in S382 as described above, thereby controlling the lamp effect for the simultaneous effect.

  If it is determined in S461 that the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol variation start process (S402). Thus, in the demo display process, the simultaneous demo display or the normal demo display is executed until the variation pattern command is received. Then, when a variation pattern command is received, the demo display is ended and the variation display is started by shifting from the demo display processing to the symbol variation start processing.

  Note that the timing for executing the simultaneous demonstration display may be based on the fact that the effect control process has advanced to the variation pattern command reception waiting process without being conditional on the effect control process proceeding to the demo display process. For example, when it is determined in S419 in FIG. 37 that the notification execution set flag is not set, it is determined whether the simultaneous demonstration display flag is set, and when the simultaneous demonstration display flag is set, The execution of the simultaneous demonstration display may be started. In other words, the timing for executing the simultaneous demonstration display is not applied when the non-variable display time for executing the normal demo display is used as a condition. You may be made to do.

  Next, the symbol variation start process in S402 of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the symbol variation start process (S402) in the effect control process. In the symbol variation start process, the following process is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not it is during a special performance period as a mission performance period (S471). Specifically, in S471, it is determined whether any one of the first special effect execution flag and the second special effect execution flag is set, and any special effect execution flag is set. It is determined that the special performance period is in progress. When it is determined that it is not during the special performance period, the display result / effect determination process at the time of normal performance is executed (S472), and the process proceeds to S474 described later. The display result / effect determination process at the time of the normal effect is based on information such as the symbol information command and the variation pattern command during the normal effect period other than the special effect period, and the display result determination process and the effect type This is a process for performing a determination process. The contents of the display result / effect determination process in the normal effect will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during the special effect period, the display result / effect determination process at the time of special effect is executed (S473), and the process proceeds to S474 described later. The special effect display result / effect determination process is a process of performing a predetermined display result determination process and an effect type determination process based on information such as the symbol information command and the variation pattern command during the special effect. . The contents of the special effect display result / effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. As described above, the method for determining the display result of the variable display and the method for determining the effect type of the variable display differ between the special effect and the normal effect.

  Then, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set in S472 or S473 (this fluctuation display time coincides with the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command) measures the fluctuation display time in the fluctuation display device 9. The variation time timer is set, and the measurement of the variation display time by the variation time timer is started (S474). Then, the variation display of the decorative pattern for deriving and displaying the display result on the variation display device 9 is started with the variation pattern set in S472 or S473 (S475). Specifically, in S475, a process timer corresponding to the first effect control execution data in the set process table is started, and set in S472 or S473 in the variable display device 9 according to the contents of the first effect control execution data. The control of the variation display of the decorative pattern with the changed variation pattern is started, and the production control is started such as the control of various lamps and the speaker 27 is started according to the variation display. For example, a control signal is output to the VDP 88 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern in the variation display device 9, and a control signal (lamp) is supplied to the lamp driver substrate 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In order to output the control execution data) and output the sound from the speaker 27, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70, whereby the effect control is started. Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol changing process (S403) (S476), and the process returns.

  Next, the display result / effect determining process at the time of normal effect in S472 of FIG. 40 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a normal effect display result / effect determination process (S472) in the symbol variation start process. In the normal effect display result / effect determination process, the following process is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol variation display performed in accordance with the received effect control command is the jackpot display result (S501). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is a flag indicating a big hit reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the big hit display result is obtained. Note that when the symbol information command reception flag set in the command analysis process is a flag indicating a probable big hit or a normal big hit, it may be determined to be a big hit display result.

  If it is determined that the result is a jackpot display result, the process proceeds to S502 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot display result is not to be obtained, it is determined whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol variation display performed in accordance with the received effect control command is not used as the reach display result (S511). Specifically, when it is determined that the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is a flag indicating an outlier reach, it is determined as an outlier reach display result.

  Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit, as a symbol information command, a command including information for specifying whether or not the game is a big hit, and in the case of a loss, whether it is a shift reach. . In this case, in S511, when the symbol information command reception flag set in the command analysis process is a flag indicating the detachment reach, it may be determined that the result is the detachment reach display result. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes, as a variation pattern command, a command including information for specifying whether or not a promiscuous big hit in the case of a big win in addition to whether or not to make a big hit and reach. May be configured to transmit. In this case, even if the effect control microcomputer 800 cannot receive one of the symbol information command and the variation pattern command, etc., it is a big hit based on the received one command. In the case of big hit, it is possible to specify whether it is a probable big hit or not, and in the case of loss, it is possible to specify whether it is out of reach. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is not limited to transmitting both the symbol information command and the variation pattern command, and whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, whether it is a probable big hit or not, One command including information for specifying whether or not it is out of reach may be transmitted.

  When it is determined that the result is the out of reach display result, the combination of out of reach symbols is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85 as the decorative display variation display result (S512). Specifically, first, the values of the random counters RU1 to RU3 for symbol determination are extracted. Then, using the reach design determination data table in which the relationship between the value of RU1 and the reach design is determined in advance, the corresponding reach design is selected from the extracted values of RU1, and the combination of the reach design is selected from the left and right designs. It is determined as a combination of stop symbols (reach symbols). Then, using the middle symbol determination data table in which the relationship between RU2 and the middle symbol is determined in advance, the corresponding middle symbol is selected from the extracted value of RU2. However, when the middle symbol corresponding to the extracted value of RU2 matches the reach symbol, correction is performed to change the middle symbol so as not to match the reach symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the above-described first state flag is set (S513). When it is determined in S513 that the first state flag is set, the first state table shown in FIG. 11 is selected as a table for determining the production type (S514), and the process proceeds to S516 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S513 that the first state flag is not set, that is, when the second state flag is set, the second state table shown in FIG. 11 is used as a table for determining the production type. Is selected (S515), and the process proceeds to S516 described later.

  In S516, using the table selected in S514 or S515, an effect type is determined in accordance with the received variation pattern command, and effect data such as process data for performing variable display with the determined effect type is set. (S516), return. Specifically, in S516, an effect for executing variable display with the effect type is selected and set by selecting a process table in which process data as data used for variable display with the determined effect type is set. Data is set. The process table is composed of data obtained by collecting a plurality of process timer set values and combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data (these data are collectively referred to as effect control execution data). It is a data table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S511 that the result is not the reach reach display result, it is the case that the result is the display result other than the reach reach display result. Specifically, in this case, an outlier designation command is received as the display result command, and a command for designating an outlier variation pattern other than the reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command. In this case, as the decorative symbol variation display result, a combination of the off symbol other than the out of reach reach display result is randomly determined using the above-described selection method of the off symbol combination and stored in the RAM 85 (S517). Then, a state table corresponding to the first state flag or the second state flag is selected as a table for determining the production type (S518), and the selected table is used to change the state table according to the received variation pattern command. Using the deviation variation pattern table in which the relationship between the deviation variation pattern command and the deviation variation pattern is set, the production type of the deviation variation pattern is determined based on the received deviation variation pattern command, and the decided production type Production data such as process data for performing variable display is set (S519), and the process returns. Specifically, in S519, the process table as described above in which process data as data used for variation display in the effect type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected and set, and reach is performed. Effect data of a variation pattern for executing a variation display that does not generate a state is set.

  If it is determined in S501 that the display result is a jackpot display result and the process proceeds to S502, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S502). Specifically, it is determined whether the symbol information command reception flag set in the command analysis process is a flag indicating a probability big hit or a flag showing a normal big hit.

  When it is determined in S502 that it is not a probable big hit, a normal big hit symbol combination is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85 as a decorative symbol variation display result (S503). Specifically, in S503, either the 0 or even decorative pattern corresponding to the random number value extracted from RU-1 is selected using the normal jackpot symbol determination data table, and the selected symbol is included. The combination of jackpot symbols is determined as the jackpot display result with the left, middle and right symbols.

  When it is determined in S502 that the probability variation is a big hit, the probability variation big hit symbol combination is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85 as the variation display result of the probability variation symbol (S504). Specifically, using the probability variation big hit symbol determination data table, any odd number of decorative symbols corresponding to the random value extracted from RU-1 is selected, and a combination of jackpot symbols including the selected symbol Is determined as the jackpot display result with the left, middle and right symbols.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the above-described promotion effect is performed during the variable display in S505 (S505). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first big hit reach command in FIG. 9C is received. This is because, when the first big hit reach command is received, the production type is determined as the first and second special big hit reach for performing the promotion effect. When it is determined in S505 that there is no promotion effect, the process proceeds to S507 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S505 that there is a promotion effect, the temporary stop display result that is temporarily stopped before performing the promotion effect is randomly determined from the combination of the normal jackpot symbols and stored in the RAM 85 (S506). . Specifically, the above-described normal jackpot symbol determination data table is looked up, and either 0 or an even number of decorative symbols corresponding to the random number value extracted from RU-1 is selected, and the selected symbol is selected. The combination of the normal jackpot symbols including is determined as the jackpot display result with the left, middle and right symbols. In the case of a normal jackpot, when performing a promotion effect, the process of S506 is not performed, and as a result of temporarily stopping display of the decorative symbols to be stopped before the promotion effect is executed, it is determined in S503 and stored in the RAM 85. You may make it employ | adopt the combination of the normal jackpot symbol memorize | stored.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the first state flag is set (S507). When it is determined that the first state flag is set, the first state table is selected as a table for determining the production type (S508), and the process proceeds to S510 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first state flag is not set, since the second state flag is set, the second state table is selected as a table for determining the production type ( S509), the process proceeds to S510 described later.

  In S510, using the table selected in S508 or S509, the production type is determined according to the received variation pattern command, and production data such as process data for performing variation display with the decided production type is set ( S510), the normal effect display result / effect determination process is terminated.

  More specifically, in S510, the above-described process table in which process data is set as data used for variation display in the representation type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected and set. Production data for executing variable display by type is set.

  Next, the special effect display result / effect determination process in S473 of FIG. 40 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a special effect display result / effect determination process (S473) in the symbol variation start process. In the special effect display result / effect determination process, the following process is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol variation display is a jackpot display result and the type of jackpot is a probable variation jackpot (S520). Specifically, when the symbol information command reception flag set in the command analysis process is a flag indicating the probability variation big hit, it is determined that the probability variation big hit.

  If it is determined in S520 that it is a probable big hit, it is determined whether or not a promotion effect is performed during variable display (S521). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first big hit reach command in FIG. 9C is received. When it is determined that the promotion effect is to be performed, the combination of the normal jackpot symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the mission achievement symbol informed by the mission effect is the normal symbol used for the combination of the normal jackpot symbol (0 and even symbols). It is determined whether or not (S522). When it is determined in S522 that the mission achievement symbol is a normal symbol, the achievement probability improvement table in which the combination of the jackpot symbol using the mission achievement symbol is determined as a display result with a high probability as a table for determining the combination of the jackpot symbol Is selected (S526).

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining various tables stored in the ROM 84 of the effect control microcomputer 800 and used for the special effect display result / effect determination process. FIG. 43A is a diagram for explaining the achievement probability improvement table. In the achievement probability improvement table, when the counter value extracted from RU-1 is within the range of “0 to 79”, the combination of jackpot symbols using the mission achievement symbol is determined as the change display result or the temporary stop display result So that when it is within the range of “80-99”, the game is distributed equally among the combinations of jackpot symbols using symbols other than the mission achievement symbols, and is determined as a change display result or a temporary stop display result. Is set. As a result, when the achievement probability improvement table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot symbol combination, the jackpot symbol combination using the mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed as a fluctuation display result or a temporary stop display result with a probability of 80%. Therefore, the jackpot symbol combination is stopped and displayed after the mission is completed with a probability of 80%.

  The achievement probability improvement table is determined when the special effect is started and stored in the RAM 85 when the value of the counter extracted from the RU-1 is within the range of “0 to 79”. In the range of “85-89”, the combination of jackpot symbols using a combination of 2 in addition to the mission achievement symbol when the combination of jackpot symbols using the mission achievement symbol is within the range of “80-84” A combination of jackpot symbols using a symbol obtained by adding 4 to the mission achievement symbol when within the range, and a combination of jackpot symbols using a symbol obtained by adding 6 to the mission achievement symbol when within the range of "90-94" The table may be configured to determine a combination of jackpot symbols using a symbol obtained by adding 8 to the mission achievement symbol when in the range of “95 to 99”. In other words, the achievement probability improvement table may be a table designed to be shared regardless of the mission achievement symbol.

  In addition, the achievement probability improvement table shows the variable display result or the temporary stop display result. For example, when the mission achievement symbol is “1”, the counter value extracted from RU-1 is “0 to 79”. The combination of jackpot symbols using “1” when within the range of “80”, the combination of jackpot symbols using “3” when within the range of “80 to 84”, within the range of “85 to 89” Sometimes a combination of jackpot symbols using "5", a combination of jackpot symbols using "7" when in the range of "90 to 94", "9" when in the range of "95 to 99" It may be a table configured to determine a combination of jackpot symbols using "". That is, the achievement probability improvement table may be a plurality of types of tables provided for each mission achievement symbol.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S522 that the mission achievement symbol is not a normal symbol, the mission cannot be achieved unless the normal symbol mission achievement symbol is added. Therefore, whether or not to add the normal symbol mission achievement symbol is determined. Is performed (S523). Specifically, whether or not to add a mission achievement symbol based on the count value extracted from RX by looking up the mission symbol addition determination table used to decide whether or not to add a mission achievement symbol. Is determined.

  FIG. 43C is a diagram for explaining the mission symbol addition determination table. The mission symbol addition determination table is determined to be added when the counter value extracted from RX is within the range of “0 to 6”, and is determined not to be added when within the range of “7 to 9”. As shown in FIG.

  In S524, it is determined whether or not it is determined in S523 that a mission achievement symbol is to be added. That is, it is determined whether or not the counter value extracted from RX is within the range of “0 to 6”. If it is determined in S524 that a mission achievement symbol is to be added, a process for adding the determined normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter extracted from the RW (S525). Specifically, in S525, the count value is extracted from the RW, and the count value from the RW and the type of mission for adding the normal symbol (for example, reach in the symbol “2” or symbol “2” to the left) A mission whose achievement condition is to display a variable display area, reach with a symbol of “4” or a mission whose achievement condition is to display a symbol of “4” to the left, and reach with a symbol of “6” Alternatively, a mission whose achievement condition is to display the left variation display area for the symbol “6”, a mission whose reach condition is to reach the symbol “8” or the left variation display area for the symbol “8”, And a normal symbol set with a relationship with a reach of “0” symbol or multiple missions such as a mission where the achievement condition is that the symbol “0” is left-shifted display area. With the mission selection data table for pressurized, select determines the type of mission to be added, stored mission type data into RAM85 indicating the type of the determined mission. As a result, the effect of adding the selected and determined mission is performed at the timing after the variable display is started and until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left variable display area (see FIG. 23F). Then, the process proceeds to S526, and the achievement probability improvement table is selected.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S524 that the mission achievement symbol is not added, the table of the jackpot symbol combination is determined as a table for determining the jackpot symbol combination (in this case, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol corresponding to the promotion effect is performed). An achievement probability normal table for determining a stop display result by equal distribution from the combination is selected (S527).

  FIG. 43B is a diagram for explaining the achievement probability normal table. The achievement probability normal table is equally distributed among the combinations of jackpot symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot according to the counter value extracted from RU-1, and is determined as a variation display result or a temporary display result. As described above, distribution is set. In this embodiment, as described above, five combinations of jackpot symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot are determined. For this reason, when the achievement probability normal table is selected, the probability of being determined as a combination of jackpot symbols using mission achievement symbols is 20%. Note that when the achievement probability normal table is selected, the probability determined as a combination of jackpot symbols using mission achievement symbols is not limited to 20%, but the achievement probability improvement table of FIG. The probability may be lower than the probability determined for the combination of jackpot symbols using mission achievement symbols when selected. For example, even if the achievement probability normal table is selected, the probability determined as a combination of jackpot symbols using the mission achievement symbol is the mission probability when the achievement probability improvement table of FIG. 43 (a) is selected. If the probability is lower than the probability determined for the jackpot symbol combination using the achievement symbol, it is set higher than the probability determined for the jackpot symbol combination using a symbol other than the mission symbol. Also good.

  In S528, based on the table selected in S526 or S527, the combination of the normal jackpot symbols is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85 as a temporary stop display result of the decorative symbols to be stopped before the promotion effect is executed. Specifically, when the achievement probability improvement table is selected in S526, the combination of the normal jackpot symbols using the mission achievement symbol (normal symbol) is determined with a probability of 80%, and the achievement probability normal table is determined in S527. Is selected, it is determined to be a combination of normal jackpot symbols using normal symbols determined by equal distribution from five types of normal symbols.

  In S529, the same processing as S504 is performed. That is, the probability variation big hit symbol combination is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85 as the probability variation symbol variation display result. In S529, a combination of probability variation big hit symbols may be randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85 as a variation display result of probability variation symbols based on the table selected in S526 or S527. Also, instead of S528 and S529, in S529, based on the table selected in S526 or S527, the combination of the normal jackpot symbol is randomly determined as a temporary stop display result of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed before executing the promotion effect. At the same time, as a variation display result of the probability variation symbol, a combination of probability variation big hit symbols may be randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85.

  A state table corresponding to the first state flag or the second state flag is selected as a table for determining the effect type (S530), and the effect type is determined according to the received variation pattern command using the selected table. At the same time, effect data such as process data for performing a mission achievement effect or a mission unachieved effect is set from the temporary stop display result determined in S528 and the mission achievement symbol (S531), and the display result and effect determination in the normal effect are determined. The process ends. Specifically, in S531, process data as data used for variation display by the effect type determined based on the received variation pattern command is executed, and the variation display by the determined effect type is executed and determined in S528. The process data for executing the mission achievement effect (specifically, “Mission Achievement!” Shown in FIG. 21 (g), etc.) is set when there is a match based on the relationship between the temporary stop display result and the mission achievement symbol. The above-described process table is selected and set. As the mission unachieved effect, for example, the special effect is continuously executed without performing the special effect when the reach is established.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no promotion effect in S521, the combination of probability variation big winning symbols is stopped and displayed, so the mission achievement symbol informed by the mission effect is a probability variation symbol (odd number symbol) used for the combination of probability variation big winning symbols. ) Is determined (S540). When it is determined in S540 that the mission achievement symbol is a probability variation symbol, the above-described achievement probability improvement table is selected as a table for determining a combination of jackpot symbols (S544).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S540 that the mission achievement symbol is not a probability variation symbol, the mission cannot be achieved unless the mission achievement symbol of the probability variation symbol is added. Therefore, the mission achievement symbol of the probability variation symbol is obtained by the same processing as S523. It is determined whether or not to add (S541).

  In S542, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in S541 to add a mission achievement symbol. When it is determined in S542 that a mission achievement symbol is to be added, processing for adding the determined probability variation symbol is performed based on the counter value extracted from the RW (S543). Specifically, in S543, the count value is extracted from the RW, and the type of mission for adding the count value from the RW and the probability variable symbol (for example, “1” symbol reach or “1” symbol left A mission whose achievement condition is to display a variable display area, reach with a symbol of “3”, or a mission whose achievement condition is to display a symbol of “3” to the left, and reach with a symbol of “5” Alternatively, a mission whose achievement condition is to display the left variation display area with the symbol “5”, a mission whose reach condition is to reach the symbol “7” or the left variation display area with the symbol “7”, Also, the probability variation design in which the relationship with the reach of the symbol “9” or the mission of “9” such as a mission whose achievement condition is that the left variation display area is output) is set. With the mission selection data table for pressurized, select determines the type of mission to be added, stored mission type data into RAM85 indicating the type of the determined mission. As a result, the effect of adding the selected and determined mission is performed at the timing after the variable display is started and until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left variable display area (see FIG. 23F). Then, the process proceeds to S544, and the achievement probability improvement table is selected.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S542 that the mission achievement symbol is not added, the variation display result is displayed by equal distribution from the combination of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (here, the promotion effect is not performed and the probability variation jackpot). An achievement probability normal table for determination is selected (S545).

  In S546, based on the table selected in S544 or S545, a combination of probability variation big hit symbols is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85 as the decorative symbol variation display result. Specifically, when the achievement probability improvement table is selected in S544, it is determined as a combination of probability variation big winning symbols using mission achievement symbols (probability variation symbols) with a probability of 80%, and the achievement probability normal table in S545 When is selected, it is determined as a combination of probability variation jackpot symbols using probability variation symbols determined by equal distribution from five types of probability variation symbols. Then, the process proceeds to S530.

  After the processing of S546 is performed, in S530, a state table corresponding to the first state flag or the second state flag is selected as a table for determining the effect type. In S531, using the selected table, the effect type is determined according to the received variation pattern command, and the mission achievement effect or the mission unachieved effect is performed from the variation display result and the mission achievement symbol determined in S546. Effect data such as process data is set, and the special effect display result / effect determination process is terminated. Specifically, in S531 after the processing of S546 is performed, the process data as data used for the change display by the effect type determined based on the received change pattern command, and the change due to the determined effect type. In addition to executing the display, the process data for executing the mission achievement effect or the mission unachieved effect in the case of coincidence from the variation display result determined in S546 and the relationship with the mission achievement symbol is set. Is selected and set.

  If it is determined in S520 that it is not a probable big hit, it is determined whether the display result of the decorative symbol variation display is a big hit display result and whether the big hit type is a normal big hit (S550). When it is determined in S550 that the game is a normal jackpot, the combination of the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the mission achievement symbol notified by the mission effect is a normal symbol (0 and even symbols) used for the combination of the normal jackpot symbol. ) Is determined (S551). When it is determined in S551 that the mission achievement symbol is a normal symbol, the above-described achievement probability normal table is selected as a table for determining a combination of jackpot symbols (S555).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S551 that the mission achievement symbol is not a normal symbol, the mission cannot be achieved unless the mission achievement symbol of the normal symbol is added. Therefore, the same processing as S523 is performed, and the mission achievement symbol of the normal symbol is performed. Is determined whether or not to be added (S552).

  In S553, it is determined whether or not it is determined in S552 to add a mission achievement symbol. If it is determined in S553 that a mission achievement symbol is to be added, similarly to S525, based on the value of the counter extracted from the RW, a process for adding the determined normal symbol is performed (S554), and the process proceeds to S555. On the other hand, when it is determined in S553 that no mission achievement symbol is added, the process proceeds to S555 as described above.

  In S557, it is determined whether or not a promotion effect (in this case, an effect that fails to rise) is performed during variable display. When it is determined that the promotion effect is to be performed, the combination of the normal jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, based on the achievement probability normal table selected in S555, the combination of the normal jackpot symbols is randomly selected as the temporarily stopped display result of the decorative symbols. And stored in the RAM 85 (S558). In S559, the same processing as S503 is performed. That is, as a normal symbol variation display result, a normal jackpot symbol combination is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85, and the process proceeds to S561. Instead of performing the process of S559, the normal jackpot symbol combination determined in S558 and stored in the RAM 85 may be adopted as the normal symbol variation display result.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect is not performed, the combination of the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, based on the achievement probability normal table selected in S555, the combination of the normal jackpot symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol variation display result. Randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85 (S560), the process proceeds to S561.

  As described above, in the case of a big hit or a probabilistic big hit, the achievement probability improvement table shown in FIG. 43A can be selected as a table for determining the combination of the big hit symbols. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, if it is a normal big hit, the achievement probability improvement table shown in FIG. 43 (a) cannot be selected as a table for determining the combination of the big hit symbols, and the achievement probability is always Normal table is selected. For this reason, the probability of accomplishing the mission is higher when the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot than when the jackpot is big. In other words, since the probability that the mission will be achieved when it is a probable big hit is increased, when the mission is completed, the probable big hit is finally made (even if the stop display result is usually a combination of the big hit symbol). , The probability of being controlled in a probabilistic state can be increased. For this reason, by achieving the mission, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the control to the probability variation state.

  In S561, a state table corresponding to the first state flag or the second state flag is selected as a table for determining the effect type. Then, using the selected table, the effect type is determined according to the received variation pattern command, and the mission achievement effect is determined from the temporary display result determined in S558 or the variation display result determined in S560 and the mission achievement pattern. Alternatively, effect data such as process data for performing the mission unachieved effect is set (S562), and the special effect display result / effect determining process is terminated. Specifically, in S562, it is process data as data used for the variation display by the effect type determined based on the received variation pattern command, and the variation display by the determined effect type is executed and determined in S558. The process data for executing the mission achievement effect or the mission unachieved effect is set when there is a match from the temporarily stopped display result or the relationship between the change display result determined in S560 and the mission achievement symbol. The process table as described above is selected and set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S550 that it is not normally a big hit, that is, it is determined that the game is out of place, it is determined whether or not the first special effect is being executed as a special effect (S569). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first special effect execution flag is set. When it is determined in S569 that the first special effect is being executed, it is determined whether or not a reach state occurs in the starting variable display (S570). That is, it is determined whether the first to third deviation reach commands are received.

  When it is determined in S570 that the reach state does not occur, the mission achievement left symbol determination table having a high ratio of determining the mission achievement symbol as the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the left variation display area is selected (S571).

  FIG. 43 (d) is a diagram for explaining a mission achievement left symbol determination table. The mission achievement left symbol determination table is determined as a symbol that the mission achievement symbol stops and displays in the left variation display area when the value of the counter extracted from RU-1 is within the range of “0 to 29”. The distribution is set so that symbols within the range of “30 to 99” are determined as symbols to be stopped and displayed in the distribution left variation display area evenly from symbols other than the mission achievement symbols. Thus, when the first special effect is being executed and the reach state does not occur, the mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed in the left variation display region with a probability of 30%, so that the symbol is displayed in the right variation display region. It is possible to generate many opportunities to maintain a sense of expectation for mission completion until is stopped. As with the achievement probability improvement table, the mission achievement left symbol determination table may be a table designed to be shared regardless of the mission achievement symbol, and the mission achievement symbol. There may be a plurality of types of tables provided for each.

  In S572, the left symbol is determined using the mission accomplishment left symbol determination table selected in S571, and the same processing as S517 is performed for the middle and right symbols (the method for determining the combination of outlier symbols). As the symbol variation display result, combinations of outliers other than the outlier reach display result are determined at random and stored in the RAM 85.

  In S575, a state table corresponding to the first state flag or the second state flag is selected as a table for determining the effect type. Then, using the selected table, an effect type is determined according to the received variation pattern command, and an effect such as process data for performing a mission unachieved effect from the variation display result determined in S572 and the mission achievement symbol Data is set (S576), and the special effect display result / effect determination process is terminated. Specifically, in S576, process data as data used for variation display by the effect type determined based on the received variation pattern command is executed, and the variation display by the determined effect type is executed and determined in S572. The process table as described above in which process data for executing the mission unachieved effect is set is selected and set from the relationship between the change display result and the mission achievement symbol.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S569 that the first special effect is not executed as a special effect and when it is determined that a reach state is generated in S570, symbols other than the mission achievement symbol are stopped and displayed in the left variation display area. The mission unachieved left symbol determination table to be determined as a symbol is selected (S573).

  FIG. 43 (e) is a diagram for explaining a mission unsuccessful left symbol determination table. The mission unsuccessful left symbol determination table is equally distributed among symbols other than mission successful symbols within the entire range where the counter value extracted from RU-1 is "0 to 99", and stops in the left variation display area The distribution is set so that the symbol to be displayed is determined. Thereby, when the reach state occurs when the first special effect is being executed, the reach state is generated with a symbol other than the mission achievement symbol, and the mission is not achieved, and the second special effect is being executed. Sometimes, a symbol other than the mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area, and the mission is not achieved. As a result, it is possible to prevent an effect that the mission is achieved even though the jackpot is not a big hit. In addition, the mission unsuccessful left symbol determination table is a table designed so that it can be used regardless of the symbol of the mission achievement symbol, similar to the achievement probability improvement table and the mission achievement left symbol determination table. There may be a plurality of types of tables provided for each mission achievement symbol.

  In S574, according to the received variation pattern command and mission achievement symbol, as a decoration symbol variation display result, a combination of outlier symbols is determined at random using the above-described method for determining the combination of outlier symbols and stored in the RAM 85. To do.

  In S574, when a reach state occurs, the left symbol is determined using the mission unachieved left symbol determination table selected in S573, and the same processing as S512 is performed for the middle and right symbols, thereby displaying the decorative symbol. As a variation display result, a combination of out-of-reach symbols is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85. If the reach state is not to be generated, the left symbol is determined using the mission unachieved left symbol determination table selected in S573, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are processed in the same manner as S517, thereby performing the decorative symbol. As the fluctuation display result, a combination of outlier symbols other than the outlier reach display result is randomly determined and stored in the RAM 85.

  After the process of S574 is performed, in S575, a state table corresponding to the first state flag or the second state flag is selected as a table for determining the effect type. Then, using the selected table, an effect type is determined according to the received variation pattern command, and an effect such as process data for performing the mission unachieved effect from the variation display result determined in S574 and the mission achievement symbol Data is set (S576), and the special effect display result / effect determination process is terminated. Specifically, in S576, the process data is used as the variation display by the effect type determined based on the received variation pattern command, and the variation display by the determined effect type is executed and determined in S574. The process table as described above in which process data for executing the mission unachieved effect is set is selected and set from the relationship between the change display result and the mission achievement symbol.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the RTCM management process in S209 of FIG. In the RTCM management process, the following process is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the standard date / time command reception flag is set (S601). If it is determined that the standard date / time command reception flag is not set, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the standard date / time command reception flag is set, it is determined whether or not the received standard date / time command is a transmission end command based on the type of command indicated by the standard date / time command reception flag ( S602). When it is determined that it is a transmission end command, the process proceeds to S604 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a transmission end command, the received standard date / time command is a standard second command, standard minute command, standard time command, standard day command, standard day command, standard month command, or standard year command. Therefore, the standard time value data corresponding to the received standard date / time command is set as the time data of the RTCM 100 (S603), and the process proceeds to S605 described later.

  In step S603, standard time-measured data is set in the RTCM 100 as follows. As shown in FIG. 14, the standard date / time command is divided into a standard second command, a standard minute command, a standard time command, a standard day command, a standard day command, a standard month command, a standard year command, and a transmission end command, and is sequentially transmitted. Is done. Therefore, the type of the standard date / time command is specified by the type of the standard date / time command reception flag, and the value of the reception standard value data stored in the RAM 85 as the standard value data indicated by the EXT data of the standard date / time command received as described above. To confirm the standard value data indicated by the standard date / time command, and the data input / output request signal and the data indicated by the received standard date / time command (standard second data, standard minute data, standard time data, standard day data, standard day data, Standard month data or standard year data) is stored in a corresponding register (second register 1021, minute register 1022, hour register 1023, day register 1024, day register 1025, month register 1026, or year of the clock / calendar counter unit 1020. Write data for writing to the register 1027) It is input from the control microcomputer 800 enters the data output circuit 105 of RTCM100. In this case, the write data includes mode data designating that it is a data write mode, and an address (second register 1021, minute register 1022, hour register 1023, day register 1024, day register 1025 to which data is written. Address data designating month register 1026 or year register 1027) and write data to be written to the address (standard second data indicated by standard second command, standard minute data indicated by standard minute command, standard time command) Standard time data, standard day data indicated by the standard day command, standard day data indicated by the standard day command, standard month data indicated by the standard month command, or standard year data indicated by the standard year command). When such write data is input, in the RTCM 100, the control circuit 106 controls the register addresses (second register 1021, minute register 1022, and the like specified by the address data input to the data input / output circuit 105. The hour register 1023, the day register 1024, the day register 1025, the month register 1026, or the year register 1027) is selected, and control for writing the write data to the selected address is performed. As a result, the count value of the designated register is rewritten to the standard value data, thereby setting the standard value data.

  In step S603, the production control microcomputer 800 receives the standard second command, standard minute command, standard time command, standard day command, standard day command, standard month command, and standard year command that are sequentially transmitted. Is executed by sequentially setting the count values of the second register 1021, minute register 1022, hour register 1023, day register 1024, day register 1025, month register 1026, and year register 1027, All the time values of the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second in the calendar counter unit 1020 can be set to standard values.

  When it is determined in S602 that the command is a transmission end command and the process proceeds to S604, the variable display device 9 performs a date / time setting completion notification to display a message indicating that the date / time setting is completed (S604). ), And proceeds to S605. By performing such date / time setting completion notification, it is possible to easily grasp that the setting of the time value of the RTCM 100 using the standard date / time command output from the standard date / time data output device 300 is completed. In step S605, the set standard date / time command reception flag is reset and the process returns to prepare for reception of the next command.

  44, the second register 1021, the minute register 1022, the hour register 1023, and the day register 1024 in the clock / calendar counter unit 1020 based on the standard date and time commands sequentially received by the effect control microcomputer 800. In the example, the count values of the day register 1025, the month register 1026, and the year register 1027 are newly set sequentially. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 800 uses the second register 1021, the minute register 1022, the hour register 1023, the day register 1024, the day in the clock / calendar counter unit 1020 based on all the received standard date / time commands. A process of newly setting the count values of the register 1025, the month register 1026, and the year register 1027 at a time may be performed.

  The standard date and time commands are not limited to sending standard date and time commands in the order of seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years, but in the order of years, months, days, days of the week, hours, minutes, and seconds. In the above example, the standard date / time command may be sent in the order of year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second. The standard second command that is most likely to have the largest difference from the actual time (standard value) depending on the time from the transmission from the standard date / time data output device 300 until it is set in the RTCM 100 is output last. The difference between the date and time and the actual standard date and time can be minimized.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an operating state, the RTCM management process can be executed at any time, so that the time value of the RTCM 100 can be set to the standard value at any time based on the standard date / time command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTCM management process may be executed only when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The predetermined execution condition may be, for example, when a demonstration display execution condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined execution condition may be, for example, the time from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time elapses. Further, as the predetermined execution condition, for example, the execution condition of the demonstration display is not satisfied, but the change display is not executed.

Next, a modification of the above-described simultaneous demonstration display will be described.
First, a first modification will be described. 45 and 46 are timing charts showing an example (first modification) of a modification of the simultaneous demonstration display. 45, in (a) and (b), the state of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine 1 (variation state, stop state) and the state of the simultaneous demonstration display (execution state, non-execution state) ) Is shown. In FIG. 45, (c) and (d) show the state of special symbols and decorative symbols (fluctuating state, stopped state) in the second pachinko gaming machine 1 and the state of simultaneous demonstration display (execution state, The relationship with the execution state) is shown. In FIG. 45, (e) shows the start timing of the demonstration display based on the time value of the RTCM 100.

  In the first modified example, the simultaneous demonstration display is executed only at the timing based on the time measured value of the RTCM 100. In the first modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a simultaneous demonstration display execution timing for executing a simultaneous demonstration display every 10 seconds (predetermined period) is set in advance, and special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Is not executed and the number of reserved memories is 0, control is performed to start the simultaneous demonstration display when the simultaneous demonstration display execution timing comes. In the case of FIG. 45, at the timing between 10:10:30 and 10:10:40, a special symbol and a decorative symbol are respectively displayed on the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine. Fluctuation display is not executed, and the number of reserved memories becomes 0, but the timing is not the simultaneous demo display execution timing, so the next simultaneous demo display execution timing is 10:10:40. When this happens, the control to execute the simultaneous demonstration display is performed. As the simultaneous demonstration display, a demonstration display in which the production mode changes in the order of the first production mode A, the second production mode B, and the third production mode C is executed.

  FIG. 45 shows an example in which there is no deviation in the time value of the RTCM 100 between the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 45, when there is no deviation in the timekeeping value as described above, the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not displayed in the same simultaneous demonstration display execution timing period, and the number of reserved memories When 0 is 0, simultaneous demonstration display is started at the same timing. Thus, when simultaneous demonstration display is started at the same timing, it can be determined that there is no deviation in the time measured value of the RTCM 100 between the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, even when the end timing of the variable display is different, the simultaneous demo display is started at the same timing in the next simultaneous demo display execution timing.

  In FIG. 46, the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine together when the time measurement value of the RTCM 100 is different between the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine. The state of the demo display (execution state, non-execution state) is shown. When there is a deviation in the time measured value of the RTCM 100, as shown in FIG. 46, a deviation (time T1 deviation in the drawing) occurs at the timing when the simultaneous demonstration display is started. The timing is different. When the simultaneous demonstration display is started at different timings as described above, it can be determined that there is a difference between the time measured values of the RTCM 100 between the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine. In addition, when a demonstration display in which the production mode changes in the order of the first production mode A, the second production mode B, and the third production mode C is executed, the start timing of each production mode is shifted (in the figure, at time T2). The timing at which the effect mode of the simultaneous demonstration display is changed due to the occurrence of a shift. When the presentation mode of the simultaneous demonstration display changes at different timings as described above, it can be determined that there is a difference in the measured time value of the RTCM 100 between the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine.

  Further, in such a modified example, when the RTCM 100 cannot perform the timing operation due to a reason such as the RTCM 100 being broken, the simultaneous demonstration display is not executed. It can be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the RTCM 100. Further, in such a modification, the opportunity to execute the simultaneous demonstration display at a relatively short cycle of every 10 seconds comes, so even if the timing for confirming whether the simultaneous demonstration display has been executed is missed, immediately Since the timing for confirming whether or not the simultaneous demonstration display has been executed comes, it is possible to eliminate the complexity of the work of the game shop clerk confirming the execution status of the simultaneous demonstration display. The first modification example as described above can be applied to both the configuration for transmitting the demo display command and the configuration for not transmitting the demo display command. In the case of a configuration in which a demo display command is transmitted, the simultaneous demo display may be started at the timing of visiting after receiving the demo display command.

  Next, a second modification will be described. As a second modification, control may be performed so that the mode of the demo display in the normal demo display and the mode of the demo display in the simultaneous demo display are different. In this way, since the mode of the demo display is different, the start time of the simultaneous demo display can be visually confirmed easily (immediately) compared to the case of the above-described embodiment.

  Next, a third modification will be described. As a third modified example, the simultaneous demonstration display executed based on the time value of the RTCM 100 is performed when the execution condition of the demonstration display is satisfied by the elapsed time after the demonstration display command is received by the production control microcomputer 800. When a predetermined execution start time is reached at a timing before (for example, 60 seconds have passed without receiving a variation pattern command), the execution may be started at that time.

  Next, a fourth modification will be described. The fourth modification includes the simultaneous demonstration display described in the above-described embodiment and modification, and all the simultaneous demonstration displays display a demonstration display image, in addition to a demonstration effect by a predetermined sound, And it sets so that the demonstration effect by a predetermined lamp (For example, the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c) may be performed. In this way, the presentation mode of the simultaneous demonstration display becomes flashy based on the sound output and the light emission of the lamp, and it is not necessary to check the variable display devices 9 one by one. Compared to the case of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation work of the start timing of the simultaneous demonstration display in each pachinko gaming machine 1 when the simultaneous demonstration display effect on the gaming machine installation island 200 is executed. it can.

  Next, a fifth modification will be described. As a fifth modification, based on the fact that the simultaneous demonstration display execution timing for executing the simultaneous demonstration display every 1 minute (predetermined time) based on the time value of the RTCM 100 is set in advance and the demonstration display command is received. During the execution of the normal demo display, even if the general demo display execution timing is reached, the normal demo display is continued, and when the next general demo display execution timing comes, the simultaneous demo display based on the timing value of the RTCM 100 May be started. In this case, the execution duration of the simultaneous demonstration display is set to a relatively short time such as 5 seconds.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) Even when it is determined that a big hit is made within the effective period of the first special effect or the second special effect, in S546, S560 of FIG. 42, FIGS. 43 (a), (b), etc. As explained, there are cases where a combination of jackpot symbols using symbols other than mission achievement symbols is determined. Therefore, even if the reach due to the mission achievement symbol does not occur within the effective period of the first special effect or the second special effect, or even if the mission achievement symbol is not displayed in the left variation display area, the combination of the big hit symbol is stopped Can be displayed. Therefore, it is a variation display in which it is determined that the reach by the mission achievement symbol does not occur within the effective period of the first special effect or the second special effect, or that the mission achievement symbol is not displayed in the left variation display area. However, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed for the display result in the variable display. Because of this structure, for example, when the variable display is performed by special reach within the effective period of the first special effect or the second special effect and with a high probability of being a big hit, the mission is quickly Even when it is notified that it has not been achieved, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the display result in the variable display is a combination of jackpot symbols.

  Further, when it is determined to be a big jackpot (YES in S550) and the normal symbol is reported as the mission achievement symbol (YES in S551), the achievement probability normal table is selected in S555, and S560 and the like are selected. Thus, the combination of the normal jackpot symbols using the normal symbols selected by the uniform distribution from all the normal symbols is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit will be made (YES in S520) and the probability variation symbol is notified as the mission achievement symbol (YES in S540), the achievement probability improvement table is selected in S544, and S546 is performed. The probability variation big hit symbol combination using the mission achievement symbol is determined with a probability of 80%. For this reason, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the probability variation symbol is reported as the mission achievement symbol, the proportion of the mission achievement by determining the combination of the probability variation jackpot symbol using the mission achievement symbol Can be increased. Therefore, interest for the first special effect and the second special effect can be improved.

  (2) As described in S528, the temporary stop display result displayed before executing the promotion effect is randomly determined from the combination of the normal jackpot symbols. For this reason, even before the promotion effect is performed, if the normal symbol is within the effective period of the first or second special effect notified as the mission achievement symbol, the combination of the normal jackpot symbol is displayed and the probability change Even if the symbol is within the effective period of the first or second special effect informed as the mission achievement symbol, the combination of probability variation big hit symbols is not displayed. In other words, when the probability variation symbol is within the effective period of the first or second special effect informed as the mission achievement symbol, the effect of forcibly achieving the mission is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the promotion effect is executed after the combination of the normal jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and the interest in the promotion effect can be improved.

  (3) When it is decided to win a probable big hit (YES in S520), when a promotion effect is performed (YES in S521), and a normal symbol is reported as a mission achievement symbol (YES in S522) ) Or when a normal symbol is added as a mission achievement symbol in S525 (YES in S524), an achievement probability improvement table is selected in S526, and a normal jackpot symbol using the mission achievement symbol with a probability of 80% is selected in S528. A combination is once determined as a stop display result. On the other hand, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made (YES in S550) and the normal symbol is notified as the mission achievement symbol (YES in S551), the achievement probability normal table is selected in S555, and S560 and the like are selected. Thus, the combination of the normal jackpot symbols using the normal symbols selected by the uniform distribution from all the normal symbols is determined. For this reason, when the mission is achieved within the effective period of the first or second special effect in which the normal symbol is notified as the mission accomplishment symbol, the rate at which the promotion effect is subsequently performed can be increased. Therefore, interest for the first special effect, the second special effect, and the promotion effect can be improved.

  (4) When the type of jackpot specified from the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped (including stop display) does not match the type of mission achievement symbol, the type of jackpot is determined in S525, S543, and S554. A mission achievement symbol addition effect is added to add the corresponding mission type. Thereby, within the effective period of the first or second special effect, it is possible to increase the chances that the combination of jackpot symbols will be displayed by completing the mission, and to improve the interest for the first special effect and the second special effect. Can do.

  (5) If it is a lag (NO in S550), and within the effective period of the first special effect (YES in S569), and no reach state occurs (NO in S570), the process proceeds to FIG. Since the mission achievement left symbol determination table shown in 43 (d) is selected, the mission achievement symbol is determined as the symbol of the left variation display area that is first stopped and displayed after the variation starts. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities to maintain the expectation for mission achievement until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the right variation display area within the effective period of the first special effect, and the interest for the first special effect is improved. Can be made.

  (6) Based on the timing value of the RTCM 100 shown in FIG. 4, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute each of the first special effect and the second special effect, and each of the first special effect and the second special effect is performed. It is. For this reason, each of the first special effect and the second special effect can be executed in accordance with the time value of the RTCM 100.

  (7) As shown in (f) of FIG. 12, a special effect that is executed every time it is determined that the start date / time of the special effect is reached based on the time value of the RTCM 100, based on the time value of the RTCM 100. When it is determined that a change condition such as a change from Saturday / Sunday / holiday date / time to a weekday date / time from Saturday / Sunday / holiday The number of times that it is determined that the start date / time of the special performance is reached per day is changed. Thereby, in addition to the execution of the special effect based on the time value of the RTCM 100, the timing at which the special effect is executed and the number of times the special effect is executed per day change. The player can also be interested in the execution form of the effect such as the timing at which the special effect is executed and the number of times the special effect is executed per day. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 5, in the production control microcomputer 800, when a standard date / time command indicating the standard value of the time measured by the RTCM 100 is input from the connector 801, as shown in S603 of FIG. Based on the standard date and time indicated by the standard date and time command, the time value measured by the RTCM 100 is set to the standard value. Thereby, in the main board 31 provided with the production control microcomputer 800, the time value measured by the RTCM 100 is the standard value based on the standard date and time command input from the connector 801 which is an existing configuration to which the production control command is inputted. Therefore, a special terminal for setting a standard value, a special port, etc. regarding the configuration related to the production control board 80 and the production control microcomputer 800 necessary for setting the time measured by the RTCM 100 to the standard value. The existing configuration can be used, and the versatility of the configuration can be ensured. Since the time value measured by the RTCM 100 can be set to the standard value in this way, the time value measured by the RTCM 100 can be made more accurate. When a predetermined effect is simultaneously executed in the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 provided, it is possible to accurately match the effects performed in the respective pachinko gaming machines 1.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 12 (f), the number of times that the special production start date / time is determined per day when the date / time changes from a weekday date / time to a Saturday / Sunday / holiday date / time. When the change is made to increase the number of times, whether or not the execution condition for the first special effect has been established based on the timing of the RTCM 100 being the execution timing of the first special effect. Whether or not the execution condition for the second special effect is established based on the fact that the time value of the RTCM 100 has reached the execution timing of the second special effect in addition to the determination of NO and the first special effect being executed No is determined and the second special effect is executed. As a result, it is clarified that the timing of executing the special effect has increased, so that the player's interest that is considered to be caused by the fact that the special effect is not executed at the timing set in advance to execute the special effect. Can be prevented.

  (10) Different effect display data depending on whether it is determined that the execution condition of the first special effect is satisfied by S484 and S486 in FIG. 36 and when the execution condition of the second special effect is determined. Is set and the special effects with different effect modes are executed. Therefore, it is clarified that the timing of executing the special effects has increased due to the difference of the effect modes, and the player mode becomes rich. Interest can be improved.

  (11) Based on the time value of the RTCM 100, the special effect is started at S484 and S486 in FIG. 36 every time the special effect setting date and time shown in FIG. 32, it is determined that the set date and time for using the first state table shown in FIG. 12B is reached in S338, and special reach is performed in S510 and S516 in FIG. 41 and S531, S562 and S576 in FIG. A special reach is performed each time execution is selected. As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12F, the interval at which the special effect execution condition is satisfied and the interval at which the special reach execution condition is satisfied are the intervals at which the special effect execution condition is satisfied. It is set to several hours every day in one week, and the interval at which the special reach execution condition is satisfied is set to an interval of timing determined at random during the period (one day) set once in one week. It is set differently. As described above, a plurality of types of specific effects executed based on the time measured value of the RTCM 100 are executed at different intervals, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which these specific effects are executed. Since the timing at which the production is executed is varied, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (12) An effect that executes a mission on the premise that a special effect is executed with a plurality of variable displays, and a reach that is executed on the assumption that a special reach effect is executed with one variable display. Since these effects are different in the aspect of the effects, there are many types of effects, and the player's interest in these specific effects can be increased, so the player's interest is further improved. Can be made.

  (13) When it is determined in S331 in FIG. 32 that the time value of the RTCM 100 matches the set date and time of the special effect notice registered as the notification information, the special effect notice is executed in S420 in FIG. By doing this, a special performance notice is given prior to the date and time when the special performance is executed, so that it can be specified that the special performance will be executed. By performing such an advance notice, the player can know in advance when the special effect is executed, so that the player can easily see the situation where the special effect is executed. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, the special reach notice is executed in S420 of FIG. 37 based on the fact that the time value of the RTCM 100 is determined to match the set date and time of the special reach registered as the notification information by S331 of FIG. Thus, before the date and time for executing the special reach, a special reach notice is given to notify that the special performance is executed. By performing such an advance announcement, the player can know in advance when the special reach will be executed, so that the player can easily see the situation where the special reach is executed. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the player.

  (14) As shown in S462 and S463 of FIG. 39, when the condition of the demonstration display that the variation pattern command has not been received for a predetermined time is established based on the determination of S424, the process proceeds to S341 of FIG. The RTCM 100 time measurement result is determined to satisfy the condition that the simultaneous demonstration display start time of FIG. 12G, which is a predetermined condition set as a condition for executing the simultaneous demonstration display, is satisfied, and the simultaneous demonstration display is performed. The simultaneous demonstration display is executed on condition that the flag is set. In this way, by providing a simultaneous demonstration display that is executed when it is determined that the timing result of the RTCM 100 satisfies a predetermined condition, the RTCM 100 is based on checking the timing at which the simultaneous demonstration display is executed. It can be easily determined outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 whether or not there is an error in the timing. As a result, it is possible to take measures to deal with the RTCM 100 timing error, such as setting the timing value to a standard value based on the determination result of whether or not the RTCM 100 timing error has occurred. Specifically, whether the time value of RTCM 100 is set (adjusted) using standard date / time data output device 300 or the time value of RTCM 100 is set (adjusted) using setting operation unit 355. Either process can be taken. Thus, for example, when such a simultaneous demonstration display is executed simultaneously on the pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged like the gaming machine installation island 200, the start timing of the simultaneous demonstration display of these pachinko gaming machines 1 is set. Based on checking whether or not a deviation has occurred, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an error in the date and time specified by the timing of the RTCM 100. For example, a plurality of pachinko games on the gaming machine installation island 200 When a predetermined effect is executed all at once on the machine 1 (for example, the aforementioned simultaneous effect set and executed as shown in (g) of FIG. 12), the effects performed on the respective gaming machines are accurately matched. It becomes possible. Further, since the demonstration display is generally performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an error in the date and time specified by the time measurement of the RTCM 100 without providing a special configuration. it can. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the time value of the RTCM 100 is adjusted based on a standard date / time command output from a standard date / time data output device 300 provided separately from the pachinko gaming machine 1, a radio clock or the like is used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a device for adjusting the time value, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented from increasing.

  (15) By S361 to S373 in FIG. 33, it is determined whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started operation, and the operation start date and time determined to have started operation is stored in the RAM 354. Then, project related information such as the project execution date and time is set in S369 based on the operation start date and time registered in S367 of FIG. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the current date and time specified by the timing of the RTCM 100 has become a specific date and time with reference to the registered operation start date and time, and various types of display modes are changed based on the determination result. Control is performed. For example, as shown in (f) of FIG. 12, the execution date and time of the special effect is based on the day of the week, the day, and the time obtained from the time measured by the RTCM 100 with reference to the operation start date and time registered in S367 of FIG. It is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (f), whether or not to execute the second special effect in addition to the first special effect is set based on the operation start date and time registered in S367 of FIG. A determination is made to change based on the day of the week, date, and time obtained from the time measurement value. Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the date and time when the special reach can be executed is the day of the week, date, and time obtained from the time measured by the RTCM 100 based on the operation start date and time registered in S367 of FIG. It is determined based on. In addition, the execution date and time of the project for changing the production mode described above is determined based on the date and time obtained from the time measurement value of the RTCM 100 based on the operation start date and time registered in S367 of FIG. In this way, with the operation start date and time determined and stored for each pachinko gaming machine 1 as a reference, determination of the execution date and time of the special effect, setting whether or not to execute the second special effect in addition to the first special effect Since it is determined whether or not it has become a specific date and time for executing the project, the date and time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced into the amusement hall is determined. For each pachinko machine with different operation start date and time, such as when different for multiple pachinko machines of the same model, the period from the operation start date and time to the change timing of the production mode by these determinations can be the same it can.

  (16) As shown in FIG. 12A, after it is determined that the time measured by the RTCM 100 is the set date and time of the registered project 2 and project 3, a selection button 358 is selected from among a plurality of production types. Is selected in response to an instruction by the player to select an effect type, so that an effect according to the player's preference can be provided, and the player's interest can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the types of effects that can be selected increase according to the length of the period from the operation start date. It can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  (17) As shown in FIG. 12 (a), a third operation period including a mountain production type A2 and a sea production type B2, and a fourth operation period including a subsequent mountain production type A3 and a sea production type B3, , The mountain production type A2 and the mountain production type A3 are related to the production style by the relevance of the story of the mountain production, and the sea production type B2 and the sea production type B3 are produced by the relevance of the story of the sea production. The production type is set so that the aspect is related. Thereby, since the related production mode is selected in the third operation period and the subsequent fourth operation period, it is possible to make the production interesting by the relevance of the production mode according to the passage of time. It can improve the interest of the player.

  (18) As shown in FIG. 5, a standard date / time data output device 300 for outputting a standard date / time command can be connected to a command input connector 801 provided on the effect control board 80. When the output standard date / time command is input to the production control microcomputer 800 via the connector 801, as shown in S601 to S603 in FIG. 44, based on the standard value of the date / time indicated by the standard date / time command, The time value of the RTCM 100 is set to the standard value. Thereby, it is not necessary to add a new configuration regarding the configuration related to the effect control board 80 and the effect control microcomputer 800 which are necessary for setting the time count value of the RTCM 100 to the standard value. Further, in the manufacturing stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the time value by the RTCM 100 can be set to the standard value by using the standard date and time data output device 300, so that the gaming hall side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the gaming hall Work burden can be reduced.

  (19) As shown in S362 to S367 of FIG. 33, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started operation is determined based on a command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 800. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the operation start date and time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the initial setting work of the RTCM 100, so that the initial setting work of the RTCM 100 can be completed in the manufacturing process of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Become. That is, in the past, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 was actually introduced into the amusement hall, it was necessary for a person to determine whether or not the gaming machine started to operate and to set an operation start date and time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself automatically determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started operation. This is because it is the same as completing the initial setting operation of the RTCM 100 when it is confirmed that the processing relating to the above is normally performed. Thereby, the work amount required after the introduction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game arcade can be reduced.

  (20) Based on the fact that the current date and time specified by the time measurement of the RTCM 100 is determined by S326 in FIG. 32 to coincide with the set date and time of the project registered at the specific date and time, the project in S414 in FIG. Is executed, the display mode in the variable display device 9 is changed. Then, when it is determined in S322 of FIG. 32 that the current date and time specified by the timing of the RTCM 100 matches the registered project notice setting date and time, the project notice is executed in S417 of FIG. Thus, a notice effect is provided to notify that it is possible to specify that the display mode is changed to the specific date and time before the specific date and time when the project is executed. By performing such a notice effect, the player can know the change date and time of the display mode in advance, so that the player can easily see the change of the display mode. , The interest of the player can be improved.

  (21) As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12C, when it is determined that the current date and time specified by the timing of the RTCM 100 is not the set date and time of the registered project 3, After a production type is selected from a part of a plurality of production types such as types A to C and it is determined that the current date and time has become the set date and time of project 3, a plurality of production types such as production types A to C are used. Since the effect types are selected from all of the effect types, the effects of the gaming machine of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be varied.

  (22) As shown in S410Y of FIG. 37 and S461Y of FIG. 39, the game is played as the simultaneous demonstration display by S463 of FIG. 39 is executed when the fluctuation pattern command is received and the fluctuation display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust because the game is interrupted by suddenly starting the simultaneous demonstration display during the game. Regarding the fact that the game is being performed as a condition for prohibiting the execution of the simultaneous demonstration display, in addition to receiving the variation pattern command, the player is operating the batting operation handle 5. It may be a condition that a signal output from the touch sensor substrate 91A is output, and the process flag value of the effect control process can be specified as a process such as a change display (for example, symbol change start) Processing, symbol changing processing, symbol stop waiting processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot game in-progress processing, jackpot game end processing).

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as a special effect, the first special effect and the mission achievement symbol that a jackpot is always made by a combination of symbols including the mission achievement symbol when a reach occurs in the mission achievement symbol. The second special effect has been described as an example in which a big hit is always made by a combination of symbols including the mission accomplishment symbol when stopped and displayed in the left variation display area. However, the special effect is not limited to this, and if the mission achievement symbol is displayed in a specific display area among the left, middle, and right variable display areas within the effective period, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Anything is acceptable. For example, when a mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display area, it may be a big hit with a combination of symbols including the mission achievement symbol. In addition, the first mission achievement symbol and the second mission achievement symbol are notified, and the first mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area, and the second mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed in the right variation display area. Sometimes, the right variation display region may be re-variable to generate a reach state, and the winning combination is always a combination of symbols including the mission achievement symbol. In addition, when a mission achievement symbol is stopped and displayed in the left or right variation display area and the middle variation display area, it will re-variate in the total variation display area, and it will always be a big hit with a combination of symbols including the mission achievement symbol. There may be.

  (2) The special effects in the above-described embodiment have been described with respect to an example in which a predetermined time (20 minutes) elapses or ends when a big hit occurs. However, the end conditions of the special effects are not limited to the above. For example, a predetermined number of times of fluctuation display, a large number of jackpots occurring a predetermined number of times, a specific combination of off-set symbols being displayed, etc. Anything is acceptable. In the case where the game is terminated by the occurrence of a big hit, it may be a condition that the big hit is a big hit generated by accomplishing the mission.

  (3) In the achievement probability improvement table shown in FIG. 43A in the above-described embodiment, when the value of the counter extracted from RU-1 is within the range of “80 to 99”, the symbols other than the mission achievement symbols In the achievement probability normal table shown in FIG. 43 (b), the type of jackpot is determined according to the counter value extracted from RU-1. In the above description, the example is determined by equally distributing the jackpot symbol combinations corresponding to. However, the achievement probability improvement table and the achievement probability normal table are not limited to those in which the distribution is set to be determined evenly among the combinations of jackpot symbols corresponding to the types of jackpots, but are determined unevenly. As described above, distribution may be set. If the achievement probability improvement table and the achievement probability normal table are set so that the probability of selecting a combination of jackpot symbols using mission achievement symbols is the highest when the achievement probability improvement table is selected Good.

  Similarly, in the mission achievement left symbol determination table shown in FIG. 43 (d), when the counter value extracted from RU-1 is within the range of “30 to 99”, symbols other than the mission achievement symbol are displayed. In the mission unachieved left symbol determination table shown in FIG. 43 (e), the symbols other than the mission-achieved symbols are determined according to the counter value extracted from RU-1. The example in which the assignment is equally determined from the inside has been described. However, the mission accomplishment left symbol determination table and the mission unachieved left symbol determination table are not limited to those in which the allocation is set so as to be equally distributed among symbols other than the mission achievement symbols. Distribution may be set so as to be determined equally. The mission achievement left symbol determination table and the mission unachieved left symbol determination table are set so that the probability of selecting the mission achievement symbol is the highest when the mission achievement left symbol determination table is selected. If it is.

  (4) The example in which it is determined whether or not the mission achievement symbol is added in S523, S541, and S552 in the above-described embodiment has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform a replacement effect in which another mission achievement symbol is replaced instead of the already announced mission achievement symbol. When performing a replacement effect, you may comprise so that the effect which replaces a mission achievement symbol may be performed in S525, S543, and S554.

  The replacement effect is determined whether or not to be executed even when NO is determined in S550, and the symbol determined based on the RW when it is determined to be executed (the normal symbol when the probability variation symbol is notified, It may be configured such that when the normal symbol is notified, an effect of replacing it with the probability variation symbol) is performed. The rate at which the replacement effect is determined to be executed when NO is determined at S550 may be configured to be lower than the rate at which the replacement effect is determined when YES is determined at S520 or S550. Good. Thereby, the expectation which a player has with respect to being a big hit by performing a replacement effect can be heightened. It should be noted that the mission achievement symbol addition effect in the above-described embodiment is similarly determined whether or not to execute even when it is determined NO in S550, and the symbol determined based on the RW when it is determined to be executed. You may comprise so that the production to add may be performed.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the promotion effect is performed after the display result is temporarily stopped during the variable display has been described. However, the timing at which the promotion effect is performed is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a timing during a big hit game, or a timing after the big hit game is over and until a new variable display is started. There may be. Further, the promotion effect may be performed a plurality of times (for example, during a variable display and a big hit game). Further, the promotion effect may be any effect that notifies whether or not the jackpot symbol combination is controlled after the jackpot gaming state is finished, after the jackpot symbol combination is stopped and displayed. For example, the jackpot symbol combination is temporarily displayed. It may be used to notify whether or not the state is controlled to the probability variation state based on the display result of the variable display after the stop display, and the state is controlled to the probability variation state by a message display that can specify whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit. May be informed of whether or not, or may be informed of whether or not the state is controlled to be in a probable change state according to a result of a predetermined mini game. In addition, although the example specified by an effect control command was demonstrated about whether to perform a promotion effect, not only this but the information for specifying the presence or absence of a promotion effect is included in a symbol information command, and this symbol information You may comprise so that it may be specified by a command.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special effect is within the effective period, it varies in the same effect mode according to the effect type selected according to the received change pattern command. An example in which display is performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and variation display according to the type of effect selected according to the received variation pattern command is performed in different effect modes depending on whether or not the special effect is within the effective period. You may comprise. Thereby, since a production | presentation aspect becomes still more abundant, the interest of a player can be improved further.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the variable display unit includes the special symbol display 8 and the variable display device 9 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation display unit may be configured only by a special symbol display device that displays special symbols. In that case, a special symbol display device is configured by a display device capable of displaying the same image as the variable display device 9, and the same symbol as the above-mentioned decorative symbol is displayed as the special symbol displayed by the special symbol display device. At the same time, control is performed so that various images other than the decorative design such as the background image described above are displayed in the same manner.

  (8) The configuration of the device for effect control is not limited to that described above, and the following configuration may be employed. A microcomputer for performing display control, a microcomputer for performing sound control, and a microcomputer for performing lamp control are provided, and a microcomputer for game control includes a display control command, a sound control command, and Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which a lamp control command is given and each microcomputer individually executes each control according to the command.

  (9) An effect control board provided with a display control microcomputer for performing display control of the variable display device 9 and a sound / lamp control board provided with a sound / lamp microcomputer for performing sound control and lamp control, for example, are provided. The display control microcomputer receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 provided on the main board 31, and the display control microcomputer performs display control based on the received command. -Sound control and lamp control command for commanding sound control and lamp control to the lamp control microcomputer are transmitted, and the sound / lamp control microcomputer receives the sound / lamp control command, and performs sound control and lamp control. May be performed. In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer includes a sound control microcomputer (provided on the sound control board) for performing sound control and a lamp control microcomputer (provided on the lamp control board) for performing lamp control. A sound control command for instructing sound control may be transmitted to the sound control microcomputer, and a lamp control command for instructing lamp control may be transmitted to the sound control microcomputer.

  (10) Effect control means for controlling the effect control device including the variable display device 9 (control of game effects) instead of the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 shown in FIG. For example, a first effect control microcomputer that performs effect control other than display control such as sound control and lamp control and a second effect control microcomputer that performs display control of the variable display device 9 are different from each other. A game control microcomputer provided on the control board gives presentation control commands including display control, sound control, and lamp control to the first presentation control microcomputer, and based on the presentation control commands. The display control command is given from the first effect control microcomputer to the second effect control microcomputer. Configured to display control, sound control, and may adopt a configuration in which an effect control including ramp control. In such a configuration, the RTCM 100, the clock circuit 353, the RAM 354, the setting operation unit 355, and the backup power supply circuits 356 and 357 described above are provided on the control board provided with the first effect control microcomputer, and the RTCM 100, The RAM 354 and the setting operation unit 355 are connected to both the first effect control microcomputer and the second effect control microcomputer. The selection button 358 is connected to both the first effect control microcomputer and the second effect control microcomputer. With such a configuration, the control relating to each of the project, the project notice, the notice, the special effect, the special reach selection rate switching, and the simultaneous operation shown in the above-described embodiment is performed by the first effect control microcomputer. It may be performed by both the second effect control microcomputer. When the first effect control microcomputer and the second effect control microcomputer are provided on separate control boards as described above, a configuration in which the RAM 354 is not provided may be employed. A configuration in which an operation day counter is provided instead of the RTCM 100 as described above may be adopted. The working day counter, for example, is a circuit that counts time to indicate “day”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second” that have passed since the operation start date and time in synchronization with the clock pulse signal supplied from the clock circuit 353. In the same manner as RTCM 100, when the supply of power is cut off, it is a time measuring means that operates with the backup power supplied from backup power supply circuit 356.

  The operation day counter operates based on the clock time signal that measures “hour”, “minute”, “second”, and the elapsed time from the start of supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 Judgment unit that determines whether or not the date is a day, and whether or not to update the count value of “day”, and the day count that updates the count value of “day” based on the determination by the determination unit Part. The working day counter starts counting time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the amusement hall and the supply of power is started. The operating day counter indicates that the time counting unit starts measuring time from the start of supply of power supply power on each day, and the state where power supply power is supplied reaches a first predetermined time (for example, 8 hours). When the determination unit determines, the determination unit recognizes that it is an operating day, and then the determination unit determines that the state where the supply of power is cut off has reached a second predetermined time (for example, 4 hours). When this happens, the day count unit adds and updates the count value of “day” for one day. For example, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started at 10:00 am, it is determined that it is an operating day at 6 pm, for example, the power supply power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 11:00 pm When the supply is cut off, the count value of “day” is added and updated for one day at 3:00 am the next day. Unlike the RTCM 100, the “day” count value is not carried even when the number of days corresponding to the month is reached, and the count is continued.

  After the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the amusement hall, the production control microcomputer 800 determines that the day when the “day” count value indicates “1 day” is the operation start date of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the count value of 1 day is stored in the RAM 354 as the operation start date and time. The count value of “day” in the working day counter is updated when the power supply is supplied for a first predetermined time or more and the power supply power is cut off for a second predetermined time thereafter. Thereby, during the business hours of the game hall, the count value of “day” in the working day counter does not indicate the working day of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in the production control microcomputer 800, in the state where the power supply is supplied, in order to confirm the working day of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the operation start date, When the count value “1 day” of the operation start date and time stored in the RAM 354 is added to the count value of “day”, and the data of the added value is determined as to which day the operation date is after the operation start date Use. Such an operating day counter may be used instead of the RTCM 100 in the configuration as in the above-described embodiment.

  The RTCM 100 may be provided on either a control board provided with the first effect control microcomputer or a control board provided with the second effect control microcomputer. However, the RTCM 100 in that case needs to be backed up by a backup power supply circuit as in the above-described embodiment.

  (11) The embodiment described above is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing a gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (12) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the RTCM 100 is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTCM 100 may be mounted on any of the main board 31, the effect control board 80, and the audio output board 70. However, the power supply needs to be backed up by the backup power supply circuit.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, the RAM 354 is not provided on the lamp driver board 35, but the RAM 85 is configured so that the stored data is backed up by a predetermined backup power supply circuit. Data reading and writing that have been performed on the RAM 354 in the embodiment may be performed on the RAM 85. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute each of a project, project notice, notification, special performance, special reach selection rate switching, and simultaneous operation. In addition, when such a configuration is adopted, the number of parts can be reduced by using the RAM 85 of the effect control microcomputer 800 instead of the RAM 354 as compared with the case of the above-described embodiment. it can.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect type related to the display on the variable display device 9 is changed by executing the project is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the effect type based on the sound output from the speaker 27 may be changed by the execution of the project, or only the effect type based on various lamps may be changed. . Further, only the effect type related to the display on the variable display device 9 may be changed by executing the project. Further, the effect type related to the display on the variable display device 9 and the effect type based on the sound output from the speaker 27 may be changed by executing the project. Further, the effect type related to the display on the variable display device 9 and the effect type by various lamps may be changed by executing the project. Moreover, the effect type by the sound output from the speaker 27 and the effect type by various lamps may be changed by executing the project. In addition, all of the effect types related to the display on the variable display device 9, the effect types based on the sound output from the speaker 27, and the effect types based on various lamps may be changed by executing the project.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the date and time when the project is executed is directly shown as the project notice, such as “four days left” as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a project notice, the date and time when the project is executed may be indirectly indicated by encryption or the like, such as “day concerning water” (message indicating Wednesday indirectly).

  (17) In S367 of FIG. 33, the operation start date and time is registered in the RAM 354. The operation start date and time registered in this way may be configured such that it can be manually corrected by inputting numerical information based on operating the setting operation unit 355, for example.

  (18) The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an operation start date / time data output unit as a means for outputting the data of the operation start date / time stored in the RAM 354 and the like to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and in other pachinko gaming machines 1 An operation start date / time data input unit for inputting the operation start date / time data output from the operation start date / time data output unit to the RAM 354 or the like is provided, and the RAM 354 is operated based on the operation start date / time data input from the operation start date / time data input unit. The data of the operation start date and time stored in the above may be rewritten. By doing so, in the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 having different operation start dates, it is possible to easily unify the dates and times for executing the project and the project notice.

  (19) The time when the project shown in the above-described embodiment is executed is set to a time when the operating rate tends to decrease based on the statistics of past operating rates related to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the operation rate by executing the project.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect type after the change at the time of executing the project is predetermined is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the changed effect type when the project is executed may be determined at random from among a plurality of effect types. In this way, it is possible to enrich the production variation by executing the project.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, as an example of changing the effect type when a project is executed, a basic screen that is a basic image such as a symbol and background displayed on the above-described variable display device 9 is used. In addition, it has been described that all of the effects such as the effect image that is displayed when the variable display such as the reach effect is performed as described above. However, not limited to this, as an example of changing the production type when executing a project, changing the production image without changing the basic screen, or changing the basic screen without changing the production image As described above, a part of the production may be changed. In addition, the selection of whether to change all of the effects or to change a part of the effects may be selected and determined at random each time the project is executed.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, in the operation start date and time setting process, when the continuous operation time reaches a predetermined time and the number of fluctuations in the predetermined time becomes a predetermined number of times or more, the continuous operation time is set. An example is shown in which the measurement start date and time is registered as the operation start date and time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the continuous operation time reaches a predetermined time (for example, a time when it becomes clear that the operation has started, such as 2 hours, 8 hours, etc.), the number of display changes of the symbol during the predetermined time However, regardless of the predetermined number of times, the measurement start date / time of the continuous operation time may be registered as the operation start date / time.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which one variable display device 9 for displaying a decorative design is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 serves as a variable display device that displays a decorative design, and includes a first variable display device that displays the first decorative design in a variable manner and a second variable design that displays the second decorative design in a variable manner. Two variable display devices with two variable display devices may be provided. For example, the first variation display device is provided in the central portion of the game board, and the second variation display device is unevenly distributed in the upward direction, the downward direction, the left direction, or the right direction from the central portion of the game board. Provide. The second variable display device may be a small display device that displays numerical values by 7-segment LEDs or the like. As described above, when two variable display devices that display the decorative symbols in a variable manner are provided, after the first variable display device starts the variable display of the first decorative symbols in response to the start winning prize, When the first decorative symbol is in the reach display mode, and the first decorative symbol is in the reach display mode, and the first decorative symbol is in the reach display mode, the display result is off. At a predetermined timing such as the time, the display of the variation of the second decorative symbol in the second variable display device is started, and on the basis of the variation display result of the second decorative symbol, a predetermined Whether or not it is a win (for example, it may be a big hit or a small hit that is more disadvantageous to the player than the big hit) is supplementarily indicated. In such a configuration, it is assumed that the second variable display device starts the variable display only at the timing as described above.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the RTCM 100 is provided as the time measuring means for performing the time measurement enabling the date and time to be specified has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other timing means such as a counter that counts the elapsed time and date from the working day may be used. In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, any timekeeping means may be used as long as it is a timekeeping means that performs timekeeping that makes it possible to specify the date and time.

  (25) In the embodiment described above, when the time value of the RTCM 100 is set to the standard value using the standard date / time data output device 300 as shown in FIG. By removing the connectors of the signal lines L1 to L9 from the substrate 31 and attaching the connectors of the signal lines L11 to L19 from the standard date and time data output device 300, the standard date and time data output device 300 is connected to the effect control microcomputer 800. An example of sending a standard date / time command was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a parallel-type relay connector capable of mounting the connectors of the signal lines L11 to L19 from the standard date / time data output device 300 is provided in the middle of the path of the signal lines L1 to L9. When the connectors of the signal lines L11 to L19 from the standard date / time data output device 300 are attached to the relay connector (for example, provided on the relay board 77), the standard date / time command from the standard date / time data output device 300 is You may comprise so that it may transmit to the microcomputer 800 for presentation control via the signal line L1-L9 from the signal line L11-L19 via the connector for relay. In this case, when the standard date / time command is transmitted from the standard date / time data output device 300, the effect control command is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. If comprised in this way, a standard date command can be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 800 without removing the signal lines L1 to L9 from the main board 31.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, based on a command (variation pattern command) transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 800 (game control means) to the effect control microcomputer 800 (effect control means), the gaming machine Operation start determination means for determining whether or not operation has started is provided (S361 to S373 in FIG. 33). The command used to determine whether or not the gaming machine has started operating as described above may be any command as long as it can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an operating state. For example, other commands such as a symbol information command, a demonstration display command, and an initialization command (an initialization command sent to the production control microcomputer 800 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on) may be used (for example, It may be determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started operating when the symbol information command is received a predetermined number of times in one day, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the demo display command a predetermined number of times in one day, It may be determined that the operation has started, and the production control microcomputer 800 receives the command once. To come, it may be determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts the operation.).

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, the example is shown in which the simultaneous demonstration display is suddenly started at the time when the simultaneous demonstration display is started, even when the normal demonstration display is being performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 800 determines whether or not the normal demonstration display is executed when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) before the time for starting the simultaneous demonstration display. If it is determined and the normal demonstration display is being executed, control for prohibiting the execution of the normal demonstration display may be performed at a timing before the predetermined time. Further, even when the normal demonstration display is not executed, the control for prohibiting the execution of the normal demonstration display may be performed at the timing before the predetermined time.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the example in which the RTCM management process (S209) for managing the count value in the RTCM 100 is executed at the timing of the timer interrupt is shown. However, the RTCM management process is not limited to this, and the interrupt process is performed when the standard date / time INT signal transmitted along with the standard date / time command is received from the standard date / time data output device 300. In the interrupt process, You may make it perform. In this way, the time from when the standard date / time command is transmitted until the time value of the RTCM 100 is set to the standard value data based on the standard date / time command can be shortened. The deviation of the time measured value of the RTCM 100 can be further reduced.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which execution of simultaneous demonstration display is prohibited on the condition that a game such as variable display is being performed. As a condition for prohibiting the execution of the simultaneous demonstration display, for example, the process in the production control process includes the symbol variation start process (S402), the symbol variation process (S403), the symbol stop waiting process (S404), and the jackpot display process ( In S405), during the big hit game process (S406) and the big hit end process (S407), it is determined that the game is being performed, and the execution of the simultaneous demonstration display is prohibited. You may do it. Further, based on the pending memory number command that can specify the pending memory number transmitted when the pending memory number changes, the production control microcomputer 800 counts the pending memory number, and the reserved memory number is “1”. When it becomes more than this, it may be determined that the game is being performed, and the execution of the simultaneous demonstration display may be prohibited. Further, when the hitting operation handle 5 is being operated, the operation control signal output as a detection signal indicating the operation state is received by the effect control microcomputer 800, whereby the hitting operation handle is determined by the operation detection signal. When it is determined that 5 is operated, it may be determined that a game is being performed, and execution of the simultaneous demonstration display may be prohibited.

  (30) In the embodiment described above, as a condition for performing demonstration display in the production control microcomputer 800, the time during which no variable display is performed after receiving the demonstration display command is a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). An example is given where the condition for displaying the demo is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a configuration in which the demonstration display command is not received, the production control microcomputer 800 measures the time during which the variation pattern command is not continuously received, and the time is a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). ), A condition for performing a demo display may be satisfied.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the RTCM 100 is provided as the time measuring means has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of using the RTCM 100 and related components, a time counter serving as a time measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since the power is turned on in a part of the storage area of the RAM 354 may be used. The value of such a time counter is set so that hours, minutes, and seconds can be counted. For example, the production control microcomputer 800 updates the count value of seconds at a predetermined period corresponding to 1 second. , Count values of hours, minutes, and seconds are updated by the same updating method as the clock. Thereby, based on such a count value, the production control microcomputer 800 can check how many hours, minutes, and seconds have elapsed since the power was turned on every business day. If it does in this way, the timing which changes the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation display apparatus 9 in every business day will be set when predetermined time passes since the time of power activation, and the timing value of the time counter of the time counter will be set Then, it becomes possible to perform the same control as when the RTCM 100 is provided, such as changing the effect mode in the variable display device 9.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the normal demonstration display and the simultaneous demonstration display are executed as the demonstration display in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the simultaneous demonstration display may be executed as the demonstration display. By doing so, it is not necessary to transmit the demonstration display command as described above from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 800 in order to execute the demonstration display. The burden can be reduced. Furthermore, since the number (number of types) of effect control commands can be reduced, the data capacity in the game control microcomputer 560 (data capacity of the ROM 54) can be reduced.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which both the notice about the special effect and the notice about the special reach are performed as the notice about the effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the notice about the special performance and the notice about the special reach may be performed. In other words, at least one of the advance notice about the special performance and the advance notice about the special reach may be executed.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the notice about the special effect and the notice about the special reach are each handled as the notice information and is notified as a part of the notice information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these notices may be handled and executed as a notice effect different from the notice information. That is, the advance notice about the special effect and the advance notice about the special reach may be handled as any information as long as the notice effect can be executed.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the gaming state controlled after the big hit is controlled to the normal gaming state that is the low probability low base state or the probability variation state that is the high probability high base state has been described. However, the gaming state that is controlled after the big hit can be controlled to a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy low base state in addition to the low accuracy low base state or high accuracy high base state according to the combination of the big hit symbol. You may comprise. In such a configuration, it is determined that the high base big hit is controlled to a low-accuracy high-base state and a high-accuracy high-base state that are advantageous to the player when paying attention to the base state. When the base symbol is reported as a mission achievement symbol, it is determined that the ratio of achieving the mission is a big hit controlled by other gaming states, and the symbols constituting the combination of the big hit symbol are the mission achievement symbols The jackpot symbol may be determined so as to be higher than the rate of achievement of the mission when notified as. In addition, it has been determined that a high-precision big hit that is controlled by a high-precision low-base state and a high-precision high-base state that will be advantageous to the player when focusing on the probability state, and the predetermined high-accuracy symbol achieves the mission. It is determined that the ratio of achievement of a mission when being notified as a symbol is a big hit controlled by other gaming states, and the symbols constituting the combination of the big hit symbols are notified as a mission achievement symbol Sometimes, the big hit symbol may be determined so as to be higher than the rate at which the mission is achieved.

In addition, although the example which changes the ratio which achieves a mission according to whether the advantageous degree of the game state controlled after big hit is high or low was explained, not limited to this, during the big hit game according to the combination of big hit symbols In a gaming machine in which the magnitude of the value acquired by the player changes, the rate at which the mission is achieved is higher when the value of the value acquired by the player becomes a big jackpot during the jackpot game. It may be configured. Changing the amount of value a player earns during a jackpot game
The number of rounds during the big hit game may be changed, the number of counts in one round may be changed, and the opening time for opening the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be changed. Alternatively, for a device provided with a plurality of special variable winning ball devices, the special variable winning ball device to be opened may be changed.

  (36) The combination of jackpot symbols in the above-described embodiment has been described with respect to the example in which the same symbols are derived and displayed in the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the variation display device 9. However, the combination of the jackpot symbol is not limited to this, and may be a combination (“Large / Hit / Ri”) in which specific characters, numbers, and symbols are displayed. Further, the present invention is not limited to adopting a variable display device that forms one effective line by the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and a plurality of effective lines (5 lines, 8 lines) are formed by four or more variable display areas. A variable display device may be employed. In this case, the mission achievement condition may be, for example, “Make a predetermined number of mission achievement symbols appear!”.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the type of mission (mission achievement symbol) is determined by random lottery in S484 or S486 when the special effect is started has been described. However, the determination of the mission type is not limited to that determined by random number lottery, and the mission type may be determined based on the time count data of the RTCM 100. Specifically, “1” is set as the mission achievement symbol when the date data identified from the time measurement data of the RTCM 100 is “1 day”, and “2” is set as the mission achievement symbol when it is “2 days”. The symbol corresponding to the time measurement data of the RTCM 100 may be similarly determined as the mission achievement symbol.

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, when a special effect is being performed and a big hit is made, the combination of the big hit symbols corresponding to the type of the big hit (usually a big hit when performing the promotion effect) is the mission. When it is not a combination using an achievement symbol (NO in S522, NO in S551), it is determined whether or not a mission achievement symbol is added (S523, S552), and a mission achievement symbol added when a mission achievement symbol is added. Has been described by the random lottery (S525, S554). However, when adding a mission achievement symbol, after determining a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the type of jackpot (usually a jackpot when performing a promotion effect), a symbol used for the determined jackpot symbol combination is added You may comprise so that it may determine by random number lottery whether it determines with a mission achievement symbol.

  (39) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view which shows the front of a game board. It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the transmission path | route of the effect control command between a main board | substrate and an effect control board, and the transmission path | route of the standard date command from a standard date data output device to an effect control board. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing detailed circuit configurations of an effect control board, an audio output board, and a lamp driver board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RTCM. It is a figure for demonstrating the random counter used in order that the microcomputer for game control may generate the random numbers used for game control. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the various random counters which the microcomputer for effect control uses for effect control. It is a figure which shows the content of the table used in order to select the effect of reach with the microcomputer for effect control in a table format. It is a figure which shows the various data table provided in order to perform a project, a project notice, a notice, a special effect, special reach selection rate switching, and simultaneous operation in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the kind of effect used by the variable display in a variable display apparatus in a table format. It is a figure which shows the representative example of an effect control command and a standard date command in a table format. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of a production | presentation display when a project and a project preview are performed with a variable display apparatus. It is a front view of the gaming machine installation island showing a display example of simultaneous demonstration display. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of a production | presentation display when a project and a project preview are performed with a variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of a production | presentation display when a project and a project preview are performed with a variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of an effect display when notification is performed by a fluctuation | variation display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of an effect display when notification is performed by a fluctuation | variation display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows the flow of the production | presentation display of the special production and normal production in 1 day according to a day of the week. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of an effect display when a special effect is performed with a variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of an effect display when a special effect is performed with a variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of an effect display when a special effect is performed with a variable display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of an effect display when a special effect is performed with a variable display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the production control main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the INT interruption process performed by the microcomputer for production control. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows specific information management processing. It is a flowchart which shows an operation start date setting process. It is a flowchart which shows simultaneous production processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows special effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect kind selection process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display process. It is a flowchart which shows the design variation start process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result and effect determination processing at the time of a normal effect in a symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result and effect determination process at the time of special effect in a design change start process. It is a figure for demonstrating the various tables used for the display result and effect determination process at the time of special effect. It is a flowchart which shows RTCM management processing. It is a timing chart which shows an example (1st modification) of the modification of simultaneous demonstration display. It is a timing chart which shows an example (1st modification) of the modification of simultaneous demonstration display.

Explanation of symbols

  9 Variation display device, 25 decoration lamp, 27 speaker, 1 pachinko machine, 100 RTCM, 800 production control microcomputer, 14a start port switch, 55 RAM, 560 game control microcomputer, 31 main board, 80 production control board 801 connector, 354 RAM.

Claims (8)

There is provided a variable display device that performs a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified in each of a plurality of display regions and derives and displays a display result, and is derived and displayed in the plurality of display regions of the variable display device When the combination of identification information results in a specific display result, the gaming machine is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
Whether or not to control to the specific gaming state, and whether or not to control to a special gaming state that is more advantageous for a player who is more easily controlled to the specific gaming state than the normal gaming state after the specific gaming state ends A pre-determining means to determine before displaying the results;
The means for determining the display result of the variation display of the identification information in the variable display device according to the determination result by the prior determination means, and determined to be controlled to the special gaming state by the prior determination means The display result is determined on the condition that the display result is determined to be the special display result among the specific display results, and controlled to the specific gaming state by the pre-determining means but not to the special gaming state. Is determined as a non-special display result other than the special display result among the specific display results, and the display result is other than the specific display result on the condition that it is determined not to be controlled to the specific gaming state by the pre-determining means. Display result determining means for determining the non-specific display result of
A result notifying means for starting the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device and deriving and displaying the display result determined by the display result determining means;
An effective period over a plurality of variable displays, specific identification information of the plurality of types of identification information, and a specific display area of the plurality of display areas are reported in a identifiable manner by the player, and the notification When the specific identification information is displayed in the specific display area within the effective period, the special effect execution means for executing the special effect controlled to the specific gaming state,
The display result determining means includes
The special display area is identified other than the specific identification information on the condition that it is within the effective period of the special effect and is determined not to be controlled to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means. Determine the non-specific display result as information,
The special identification information used for the special display result as the specific identification information is within the effective period of the special effect in which the special identification information is notified, and the special determination state is controlled by the predetermining means and the special On the condition that it is determined to control to the gaming state, the special display result that is a combination of the specific identification information at a predetermined rate is determined,
The non-special identification information used for the non-special display result as the specific identification information is within the effective period of the special effect that is notified, and is controlled to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means. The non-special display result that is a combination of the specific identification information is determined at a rate lower than the predetermined rate on the condition that it is determined not to control to the special gaming state. . The prior decision means further informs whether or not to control to the special gaming state after displaying a display result when determining to control to the special gaming state and control to the special gaming state. Decide whether to perform the production,
The result notifying unit executes the state notifying effect on the condition that the state determining effect is determined to be executed by the prior determining unit,
The display result determination means displays before executing the state notification effect regardless of whether the special effect is within the effective period and whether the specific identification information is the special identification information. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a display result is determined as the non-special display result.   The display result determining means controls the specific gaming state by the prior determining means when the non-special identification information is notified as the specific identification information within the effective period of the special effect. When the non-special display result is a combination of the specific identification information when it is determined not to control the gaming state, the pre-determining means controls the specific gaming state at a rate higher than the rate determined. The non-special display result, which is a combination of the specific identification information, is determined as a display result to be displayed before executing the state notification effect when it is determined to control to a special gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to 2.   It is determined that the special game state is controlled by the pre-determining means but is not controlled to the special game state when the special identification information is notified as the specific identification information within the effective period of the special effect. The non-special identification information is notified as the specific identification information on the condition that the non-special display result is notified and the non-special display result is notified as the specific identification information. Displaying the specific identification information effect informing the special identification information as the specific identification information on the condition that it is determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state and controlled to the special gaming state by the pre-article determination means The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising specific identification information effect executing means that is executed before displaying the result. The variable display device has three or more display areas,
The special effect execution means informs the player of two or more display areas other than the final display area where the identification information is finally displayed according to a predetermined order as the specific display area.
The display result determining means is in the effective period of the special effect, and on the condition that the prior determination means determines not to control the specific gaming state, the display result determining means Among the specific identification information, the identification information of the destination display area in which the identification information is displayed first in accordance with the predetermined order is higher than the ratio of determining any identification information other than the specific identification information. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is determined as follows. A time measuring means for measuring time and date that can be specified;
Special effect execution condition determining means for determining whether or not a special effect execution condition for executing the special effect is established based on the time value of the time measuring means;
6. The special effect execution means executes the special effect each time the special effect execution condition determination means determines that the special effect execution condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of the above. Based on the time value of the time measuring means, a change condition determining means for determining whether a preset change condition is satisfied,
Special effect execution for changing the number of times that the special effect execution condition determination unit determines that the special effect execution condition is satisfied during a specific period when the change condition determination unit determines that the change condition is satisfied The game machine according to claim 6, further comprising a number-of-times changing means. Game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command for controlling the variable display device;
Effect control means for controlling the variable display device in a predetermined effect mode based on the effect control command transmitted from the game control means,
The production control means includes
The timing means;
The special performance execution means;
Command input means for inputting the effect control command,
The command input means can input a date / time standard value command indicating a standard value of the date / time used by the time measuring means.
When the date standard value command is input from the command input unit, the effect control unit sets the time measured by the time measuring unit to a standard value based on the standard value of the date indicated by the date standard value command. The gaming machine according to claim 6 or 7, further comprising a date and time setting means.

Images